Upda the documentation on assembler error message generation.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
238 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
239 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
240 [@b{--statistics}]
241 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
242 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
243 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
244 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
245 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
246 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
247 @c
248 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
249 @c Add an empty line for separation.
250 @ifset AARCH64
251
252 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
253 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
254 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
255 @end ifset
256 @ifset ALPHA
257
258 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
259 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
260 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
261 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
262 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
263 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
264 @end ifset
265 @ifset ARC
266
267 @emph{Target ARC options:}
268 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
269 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
270 [@b{-mcode-density}]
271 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
272 @end ifset
273 @ifset ARM
274
275 @emph{Target ARM options:}
276 @c Don't document the deprecated options
277 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
278 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
279 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
280 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
281 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
282 [@b{-mthumb}]
283 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
284 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
285 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
286 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
287 @end ifset
288 @ifset Blackfin
289
290 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
291 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
292 [@b{-mfdpic}]
293 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
294 [@b{-mnopic}]
295 @end ifset
296 @ifset CRIS
297
298 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
299 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
300 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
301 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
302 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
303 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
304 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
305 @end ifset
306 @ifset D10V
307
308 @emph{Target D10V options:}
309 [@b{-O}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset D30V
312
313 @emph{Target D30V options:}
314 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset EPIPHANY
317
318 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
319 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset H8
322
323 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
324 [-h-tick-hex]
325 @end ifset
326 @ifset HPPA
327 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
328 @end ifset
329 @ifset I80386
330
331 @emph{Target i386 options:}
332 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
333 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
334 @end ifset
335 @ifset I960
336
337 @emph{Target i960 options:}
338 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
339 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
340 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
341 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
342 @end ifset
343 @ifset IA64
344
345 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
346 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
347 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
348 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
349 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
350 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
351 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
352 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
353 @end ifset
354 @ifset IP2K
355
356 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
357 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset M32C
360
361 @emph{Target M32C options:}
362 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
363 @end ifset
364 @ifset M32R
365
366 @emph{Target M32R options:}
367 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
368 @b{--W[n]p}]
369 @end ifset
370 @ifset M680X0
371
372 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
373 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
374 @end ifset
375 @ifset M68HC11
376
377 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
378 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
379 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
380 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
381 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
382 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
383 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
384 @end ifset
385 @ifset MCORE
386
387 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
388 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
389 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
390 @end ifset
391 @ifset METAG
392
393 @emph{Target Meta options:}
394 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
395 @end ifset
396 @ifset MICROBLAZE
397 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
398 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
399 @end ifset
400 @ifset MIPS
401
402 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
403 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
404 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
405 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
406 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
407 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
408 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
409 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
410 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
411 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
412 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
413 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
414 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
415 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
416 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
417 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
418 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
419 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
420 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
421 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
422 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
423 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
424 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
425 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
426 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
427 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
428 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
429 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
430 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
431 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
432 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
433 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
434 @end ifset
435 @ifset MMIX
436
437 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
438 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
439 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
440 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
441 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
442 @end ifset
443 @ifset NIOSII
444
445 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
446 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
447 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
448 @end ifset
449 @ifset NDS32
450
451 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
452 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
453 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
454 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
455 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
456 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
457 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
458 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
459 [@b{-mb2bb}]
460 @end ifset
461 @ifset PDP11
462
463 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
464 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
465 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
466 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
467 @end ifset
468 @ifset PJ
469
470 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
471 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
472 @end ifset
473 @ifset PPC
474
475 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
476 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
477 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
478 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
479 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
480 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
481 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
482 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
483 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
484 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
485 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
486 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
487 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
488 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
489 @end ifset
490 @ifset RL78
491
492 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
493 [@b{-mg10}]
494 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
495 @end ifset
496 @ifset RX
497
498 @emph{Target RX options:}
499 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
500 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
501 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
502 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
503 [@b{-mpid}]
504 [@b{-mrelax}]
505 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
506 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
507 @end ifset
508 @ifset S390
509
510 @emph{Target s390 options:}
511 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
512 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
513 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
514 @end ifset
515 @ifset SCORE
516
517 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
518 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
519 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
520 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
521 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
522 @end ifset
523 @ifset SPARC
524
525 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
526 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
527 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
528 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
529 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
530 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
531 @end ifset
532 @ifset TIC54X
533
534 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
535 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
536 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
537 @end ifset
538 @ifset TIC6X
539
540 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
541 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
542 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
543 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
544 @end ifset
545 @ifset TILEGX
546
547 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
548 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
549 @end ifset
550 @ifset TILEPRO
551 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
552 @end ifset
553 @ifset VISIUM
554
555 @emph{Target Visium options:}
556 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
557 @end ifset
558 @ifset XTENSA
559
560 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
561 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
562 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
563 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
564 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
565 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
566 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
567 @end ifset
568 @ifset Z80
569
570 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
571 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
572 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
573 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
574 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
575 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
576 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
577 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
578 @end ifset
579 @ifset Z8000
580
581 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
582 @end ifset
583
584 @c man end
585 @end smallexample
586
587 @c man begin OPTIONS
588
589 @table @gcctabopt
590 @include at-file.texi
591
592 @item -a[cdghlmns]
593 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
594
595 @table @gcctabopt
596 @item -ac
597 omit false conditionals
598
599 @item -ad
600 omit debugging directives
601
602 @item -ag
603 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
604
605 @item -ah
606 include high-level source
607
608 @item -al
609 include assembly
610
611 @item -am
612 include macro expansions
613
614 @item -an
615 omit forms processing
616
617 @item -as
618 include symbols
619
620 @item =file
621 set the name of the listing file
622 @end table
623
624 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
625 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
626 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
627
628 @item --alternate
629 Begin in alternate macro mode.
630 @ifclear man
631 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
632 @end ifclear
633
634 @item --compress-debug-sections
635 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
636 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
637 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
638 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
639
640 @ifset ELF
641 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
642 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
643 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
644 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
645 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
646 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
647 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
648 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
649 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
650 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
651 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
652 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
653 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
654 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
655 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
656
657 @end ifset
658
659 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
660 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
661 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
662 override this.
663
664 @item -D
665 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
666 other assemblers.
667
668 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
669 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
670 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
671
672 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
673 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
674 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
675 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
676 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
677 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
678
679 @item -f
680 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
681 compiler output).
682
683 @item -g
684 @itemx --gen-debug
685 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
686 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
687 ECOFF or DWARF2.
688
689 @item --gstabs
690 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
691 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
692
693 @item --gstabs+
694 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
695 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
696 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
697 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
698 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
699
700 @item --gdwarf-2
701 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
702 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
703 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
704
705 @item --gdwarf-sections
706 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
707 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
708 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
709 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
710 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
711 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
712 suffix.
713
714 @item --size-check=error
715 @itemx --size-check=warning
716 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
717
718 @item --help
719 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
720
721 @item --target-help
722 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
723
724 @item -I @var{dir}
725 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
726
727 @item -J
728 Don't warn about signed overflow.
729
730 @item -K
731 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
732 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
733 @end ifclear
734 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
735 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
736 @end ifset
737
738 @item -L
739 @itemx --keep-locals
740 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
741 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
742 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
743 @ifclear man
744 @xref{Symbol Names}.
745 @end ifclear
746
747 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
748 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
749 listing to @var{number}.
750
751 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
752 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
753 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
754
755 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
756 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
757 @var{number} bytes.
758
759 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
760 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
761 to @var{number} + 1.
762
763 @item -o @var{objfile}
764 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
765
766 @item -R
767 Fold the data section into the text section.
768
769 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
770 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
771 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
772 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
773 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
774 requirements at the expense of speed.
775
776 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
777 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
778 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
779 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
780
781 @ifset ELF
782 @item --sectname-subst
783 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
784 @ifclear man
785 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
786 @end ifclear
787 @end ifset
788
789 @item --statistics
790 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
791 assembly.
792
793 @item --strip-local-absolute
794 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
795
796 @item -v
797 @itemx -version
798 Print the @command{as} version.
799
800 @item --version
801 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
802
803 @item -W
804 @itemx --no-warn
805 Suppress warning messages.
806
807 @item --fatal-warnings
808 Treat warnings as errors.
809
810 @item --warn
811 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
812
813 @item -w
814 Ignored.
815
816 @item -x
817 Ignored.
818
819 @item -Z
820 Generate an object file even after errors.
821
822 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
823 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
824
825 @end table
826 @c man end
827
828 @ifset AARCH64
829
830 @ifclear man
831 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
832 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
833 @end ifclear
834
835 @ifset man
836 @c man begin OPTIONS
837 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
838 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
839 @c man end
840 @c man begin INCLUDE
841 @include c-aarch64.texi
842 @c ended inside the included file
843 @end ifset
844
845 @end ifset
846
847 @ifset ALPHA
848
849 @ifclear man
850 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
851 for an Alpha processor.
852 @end ifclear
853
854 @ifset man
855 @c man begin OPTIONS
856 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
857 processor.
858 @c man end
859 @c man begin INCLUDE
860 @include c-alpha.texi
861 @c ended inside the included file
862 @end ifset
863
864 @end ifset
865
866 @c man begin OPTIONS
867 @ifset ARC
868 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
869 processor.
870
871 @table @gcctabopt
872 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
873 This option selects the core processor variant.
874 @item -EB | -EL
875 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
876 @item -mcode-density
877 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
878 @end table
879 @end ifset
880
881 @ifset ARM
882 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
883 processor family.
884
885 @table @gcctabopt
886 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
887 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
888 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
889 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
890 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
891 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
892 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
893 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
894 @item -mthumb
895 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
896 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
897 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
898 @item -EB | -EL
899 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
900 @item -mthumb-interwork
901 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
902 ARM code in mind.
903 @item -mccs
904 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
905 @item -k
906 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
907 @end table
908 @end ifset
909 @c man end
910
911 @ifset Blackfin
912
913 @ifclear man
914 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
915 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
916 @end ifclear
917
918 @ifset man
919 @c man begin OPTIONS
920 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
921 the Blackfin processor family.
922 @c man end
923 @c man begin INCLUDE
924 @include c-bfin.texi
925 @c ended inside the included file
926 @end ifset
927
928 @end ifset
929
930 @c man begin OPTIONS
931 @ifset CRIS
932 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
933 @end ifset
934
935 @ifset D10V
936 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
937 a D10V processor.
938 @table @gcctabopt
939 @cindex D10V optimization
940 @cindex optimization, D10V
941 @item -O
942 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
943 @end table
944 @end ifset
945
946 @ifset D30V
947 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
948 processor.
949 @table @gcctabopt
950 @cindex D30V optimization
951 @cindex optimization, D30V
952 @item -O
953 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
954
955 @cindex D30V nops
956 @item -n
957 Warn when nops are generated.
958
959 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
960 @item -N
961 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
962 @end table
963 @end ifset
964 @c man end
965
966 @ifset EPIPHANY
967 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
968 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
969
970 @ifclear man
971 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
972 configured for an Epiphany processor.
973 @end ifclear
974
975 @ifset man
976 @c man begin OPTIONS
977 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
978 an Epiphany processor.
979 @c man end
980 @c man begin INCLUDE
981 @include c-epiphany.texi
982 @c ended inside the included file
983 @end ifset
984
985 @end ifset
986
987 @ifset H8300
988
989 @ifclear man
990 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
991 for an H8/300 processor.
992 @end ifclear
993
994 @ifset man
995 @c man begin OPTIONS
996 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
997 processor.
998 @c man end
999 @c man begin INCLUDE
1000 @include c-h8300.texi
1001 @c ended inside the included file
1002 @end ifset
1003
1004 @end ifset
1005
1006 @ifset I80386
1007
1008 @ifclear man
1009 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1010 configured for an i386 processor.
1011 @end ifclear
1012
1013 @ifset man
1014 @c man begin OPTIONS
1015 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1016 an i386 processor.
1017 @c man end
1018 @c man begin INCLUDE
1019 @include c-i386.texi
1020 @c ended inside the included file
1021 @end ifset
1022
1023 @end ifset
1024
1025 @c man begin OPTIONS
1026 @ifset I960
1027 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1028 Intel 80960 processor.
1029
1030 @table @gcctabopt
1031 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1032 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1033
1034 @item -b
1035 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1036
1037 @item -no-relax
1038 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1039 error if necessary.
1040
1041 @end table
1042 @end ifset
1043
1044 @ifset IP2K
1045 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1046 Ubicom IP2K series.
1047
1048 @table @gcctabopt
1049
1050 @item -mip2022ext
1051 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1052
1053 @item -mip2022
1054 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1055 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1056
1057 @end table
1058 @end ifset
1059
1060 @ifset M32C
1061 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1062 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1063
1064 @table @gcctabopt
1065
1066 @item -m32c
1067 Assemble M32C instructions.
1068
1069 @item -m16c
1070 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1071
1072 @item -relax
1073 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1074
1075 @item -h-tick-hex
1076 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1077
1078 @end table
1079 @end ifset
1080
1081 @ifset M32R
1082 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1083 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1084
1085 @table @gcctabopt
1086
1087 @item --m32rx
1088 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1089 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1090
1091 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1092 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1093 encountered.
1094
1095 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1096 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1097 encountered.
1098
1099 @end table
1100 @end ifset
1101
1102 @ifset M680X0
1103 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1104 Motorola 68000 series.
1105
1106 @table @gcctabopt
1107
1108 @item -l
1109 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1110
1111 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1112 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1113 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1114 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1115 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1116
1117 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1118 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1119 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1120 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1121 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1122 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1123
1124 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1125 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1126 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1127
1128 @end table
1129 @end ifset
1130
1131 @ifset NIOSII
1132
1133 @ifclear man
1134 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1135 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1136 @end ifclear
1137
1138 @ifset man
1139 @c man begin OPTIONS
1140 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1141 Altera Nios II processor.
1142 @c man end
1143 @c man begin INCLUDE
1144 @include c-nios2.texi
1145 @c ended inside the included file
1146 @end ifset
1147 @end ifset
1148
1149 @ifset PDP11
1150
1151 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1152 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1153
1154 @table @gcctabopt
1155 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1156 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1157 default is @option{-mpic}.
1158
1159 @item -mall
1160 @itemx -mall-extensions
1161 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1162
1163 @item -mno-extensions
1164 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1165
1166 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1167 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1168
1169 @item -m@var{cpu}
1170 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1171 disable all other extensions.
1172
1173 @item -m@var{machine}
1174 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1175 model, and disable all other extensions.
1176 @end table
1177
1178 @end ifset
1179
1180 @ifset PJ
1181 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1182 a picoJava processor.
1183
1184 @table @gcctabopt
1185
1186 @cindex PJ endianness
1187 @cindex endianness, PJ
1188 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1189 @item -mb
1190 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1191
1192 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1193 @item -ml
1194 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1195
1196 @end table
1197 @end ifset
1198
1199 @ifset M68HC11
1200 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1201 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1202
1203 @table @gcctabopt
1204
1205 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1206 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1207 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1208
1209 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1210 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1211 XGATE address space.
1212
1213 @item -mshort
1214 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1215
1216 @item -mlong
1217 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1218
1219 @item -mshort-double
1220 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1221
1222 @item -mlong-double
1223 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1224
1225 @item --force-long-branches
1226 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1227 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1228 sub routine.
1229
1230 @item -S | --short-branches
1231 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1232 when the offset is out of range.
1233
1234 @item --strict-direct-mode
1235 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1236 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1237
1238 @item --print-insn-syntax
1239 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1240
1241 @item --print-opcodes
1242 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1243
1244 @item --generate-example
1245 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1246 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1247
1248 @end table
1249 @end ifset
1250
1251 @ifset SPARC
1252 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1253 for the SPARC architecture:
1254
1255 @table @gcctabopt
1256 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1257 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1258 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1259
1260 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1261 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1262
1263 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1264 UltraSPARC extensions.
1265
1266 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1267 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1268 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1269
1270 @item -bump
1271 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1272 @end table
1273 @end ifset
1274
1275 @ifset TIC54X
1276 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1277 architecture.
1278
1279 @table @gcctabopt
1280 @item -mfar-mode
1281 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1282 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1283 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1284 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1285 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1286 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1287 behaviour in the shell.
1288 @end table
1289 @end ifset
1290
1291 @ifset MIPS
1292 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1293 a MIPS processor.
1294
1295 @table @gcctabopt
1296 @item -G @var{num}
1297 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1298 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1299 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1300
1301 @cindex MIPS endianness
1302 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1303 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1304 @item -EB
1305 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1306
1307 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1308 @item -EL
1309 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1310
1311 @cindex MIPS ISA
1312 @item -mips1
1313 @itemx -mips2
1314 @itemx -mips3
1315 @itemx -mips4
1316 @itemx -mips5
1317 @itemx -mips32
1318 @itemx -mips32r2
1319 @itemx -mips32r3
1320 @itemx -mips32r5
1321 @itemx -mips32r6
1322 @itemx -mips64
1323 @itemx -mips64r2
1324 @itemx -mips64r3
1325 @itemx -mips64r5
1326 @itemx -mips64r6
1327 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1328 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1329 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1330 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1331 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1332 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1333 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1334 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1335 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1336 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1337
1338 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1339 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1340
1341 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1342 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1343
1344 @item -mfix7000
1345 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1346 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1347 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1348
1349 @item -mfix-rm7000
1350 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1351 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1352 followed by a load instruction.
1353
1354 @item -mdebug
1355 @itemx -no-mdebug
1356 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1357 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1358
1359 @item -mpdr
1360 @itemx -mno-pdr
1361 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1362
1363 @item -mgp32
1364 @itemx -mfp32
1365 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1366 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1367 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1368 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1369
1370 @item -mgp64
1371 @itemx -mfp64
1372 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1373 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1374 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1375 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1376
1377 @item -mfpxx
1378 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1379 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1380 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1381 32 or 64 bits wide.
1382
1383 @item -modd-spreg
1384 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1385 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1386 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1387 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1388
1389 @item -mips16
1390 @itemx -no-mips16
1391 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1392 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1393 turns off this option.
1394
1395 @item -mmicromips
1396 @itemx -mno-micromips
1397 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1398 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1399 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1400 at the start of the assembly file.
1401
1402 @item -msmartmips
1403 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1404 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1405 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1406 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1407
1408 @item -mips3d
1409 @itemx -no-mips3d
1410 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1411 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1412 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1413
1414 @item -mdmx
1415 @itemx -no-mdmx
1416 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1417 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1418 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1419
1420 @item -mdsp
1421 @itemx -mno-dsp
1422 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1423 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1424 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1425
1426 @item -mdspr2
1427 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1428 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1429 This option implies -mdsp.
1430 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1431 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1432
1433 @item -mmsa
1434 @itemx -mno-msa
1435 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1436 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1437 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1438
1439 @item -mxpa
1440 @itemx -mno-xpa
1441 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1442 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1443 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1444
1445 @item -mmt
1446 @itemx -mno-mt
1447 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1448 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1449 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1450
1451 @item -mmcu
1452 @itemx -mno-mcu
1453 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1454 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1455 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1456
1457 @item -minsn32
1458 @itemx -mno-insn32
1459 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1460 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1461 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1462 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1463 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1464 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1465 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1466
1467 @item --construct-floats
1468 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1469 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1470 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1471 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1472 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1473 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1474
1475 @item --relax-branch
1476 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1477 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1478 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1479 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1480
1481 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1482 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1483 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1484
1485 @cindex emulation
1486 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1487 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1488 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1489 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1490 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1491
1492 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1493 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1494 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1495 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1496 preferred options instead.
1497
1498 @item -nocpp
1499 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1500 the native tools.
1501
1502 @item --trap
1503 @itemx --no-trap
1504 @itemx --break
1505 @itemx --no-break
1506 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1507 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1508 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1509 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1510 break exception.
1511
1512 @item -n
1513 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1514 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1515 @end table
1516 @end ifset
1517
1518 @ifset MCORE
1519 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1520 an MCore processor.
1521
1522 @table @gcctabopt
1523 @item -jsri2bsr
1524 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1525 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1526 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1527
1528 @item -sifilter
1529 @itemx -nosifilter
1530 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1531 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1532
1533 @item -relax
1534 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1535
1536 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1537 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1538 can be assembled.
1539
1540 @item -EB
1541 Assemble for a big endian target.
1542
1543 @item -EL
1544 Assemble for a little endian target.
1545
1546 @end table
1547 @end ifset
1548 @c man end
1549
1550 @ifset METAG
1551
1552 @ifclear man
1553 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1554 for a Meta processor.
1555 @end ifclear
1556
1557 @ifset man
1558 @c man begin OPTIONS
1559 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1560 Meta processor.
1561 @c man end
1562 @c man begin INCLUDE
1563 @include c-metag.texi
1564 @c ended inside the included file
1565 @end ifset
1566
1567 @end ifset
1568
1569 @c man begin OPTIONS
1570 @ifset MMIX
1571 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1572 @end ifset
1573
1574 @ifset NDS32
1575
1576 @ifclear man
1577 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1578 for a NDS32 processor.
1579 @end ifclear
1580 @c ended inside the included file
1581 @end ifset
1582
1583 @ifset man
1584 @c man begin OPTIONS
1585 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1586 NDS32 processor.
1587 @c man end
1588 @c man begin INCLUDE
1589 @include c-nds32.texi
1590 @c ended inside the included file
1591 @end ifset
1592
1593 @c man end
1594 @ifset PPC
1595
1596 @ifclear man
1597 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1598 for a PowerPC processor.
1599 @end ifclear
1600
1601 @ifset man
1602 @c man begin OPTIONS
1603 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1604 PowerPC processor.
1605 @c man end
1606 @c man begin INCLUDE
1607 @include c-ppc.texi
1608 @c ended inside the included file
1609 @end ifset
1610
1611 @end ifset
1612
1613 @c man begin OPTIONS
1614 @ifset RX
1615 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1616 @end ifset
1617
1618 @ifset S390
1619 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1620 processor family.
1621
1622 @table @gcctabopt
1623 @item -m31
1624 @itemx -m64
1625 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1626 @item -mesa
1627 @item -mzarch
1628 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1629 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1630 @item -march=@var{processor}
1631 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1632 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1633 @samp{z196}, @samp{zEC12}, or @samp{z13}.
1634 @item -mregnames
1635 @itemx -mno-regnames
1636 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1637 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1638 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1639 but evaluates to zero.
1640 @end table
1641 @end ifset
1642 @c man end
1643
1644 @ifset TIC6X
1645
1646 @ifclear man
1647 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1648 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1649 @end ifclear
1650
1651 @ifset man
1652 @c man begin OPTIONS
1653 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1654 TMS320C6000 processor.
1655 @c man end
1656 @c man begin INCLUDE
1657 @include c-tic6x.texi
1658 @c ended inside the included file
1659 @end ifset
1660
1661 @end ifset
1662
1663 @ifset TILEGX
1664
1665 @ifclear man
1666 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1667 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1668 @end ifclear
1669
1670 @ifset man
1671 @c man begin OPTIONS
1672 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1673 processor.
1674 @c man end
1675 @c man begin INCLUDE
1676 @include c-tilegx.texi
1677 @c ended inside the included file
1678 @end ifset
1679
1680 @end ifset
1681
1682 @ifset VISIUM
1683
1684 @ifclear man
1685 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1686 for a Visium processor.
1687 @end ifclear
1688
1689 @ifset man
1690 @c man begin OPTIONS
1691 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1692 processor.
1693 @c man end
1694 @c man begin INCLUDE
1695 @include c-visium.texi
1696 @c ended inside the included file
1697 @end ifset
1698
1699 @end ifset
1700
1701 @ifset XTENSA
1702
1703 @ifclear man
1704 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1705 for an Xtensa processor.
1706 @end ifclear
1707
1708 @ifset man
1709 @c man begin OPTIONS
1710 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1711 Xtensa processor.
1712 @c man end
1713 @c man begin INCLUDE
1714 @include c-xtensa.texi
1715 @c ended inside the included file
1716 @end ifset
1717
1718 @end ifset
1719
1720 @c man begin OPTIONS
1721
1722 @ifset Z80
1723 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1724 a Z80 family processor.
1725 @table @gcctabopt
1726 @item -z80
1727 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1728 @item -r800
1729 Assemble for R800 processor.
1730 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1731 @itemx -Wnud
1732 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1733 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1734 @itemx -Wnup
1735 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1736 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1737 @itemx -Wud
1738 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1739 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1740 @itemx -Wup
1741 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1742 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1743 @itemx -Fud
1744 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1745 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1746 @itemx -Fup
1747 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1748 @end table
1749 @end ifset
1750
1751 @c man end
1752
1753 @menu
1754 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1755 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1756 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1757 * Command Line:: Command Line
1758 * Input Files:: Input Files
1759 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1760 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1761 @end menu
1762
1763 @node Manual
1764 @section Structure of this Manual
1765
1766 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1767 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1768 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1769 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1770 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1771
1772 @ifclear GENERIC
1773 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1774 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1775 @end ifclear
1776 @ifset GENERIC
1777 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1778 various flavors of the assembler.
1779 @end ifset
1780
1781 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1782 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1783 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1784 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1785 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1786 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1787 particular architecture.
1788 @ifset GENERIC
1789 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1790 machine architecture manual for this information.
1791 @end ifset
1792 @ifclear GENERIC
1793 @ifset H8/300
1794 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1795 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1796 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1797 @end ifset
1798 @ifset SH
1799 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1800 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1801 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1802 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1803 @end ifset
1804 @ifset Z8000
1805 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1806 @end ifset
1807 @end ifclear
1808
1809 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1810 @ignore
1811 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1812 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1813 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1814 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1815 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1816 qualification.
1817
1818 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1819 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1820 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1821 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1822 @end ignore
1823
1824 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1825 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1826 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1827 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1828 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1829 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1830 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1831 @c directives).
1832
1833 @node GNU Assembler
1834 @section The GNU Assembler
1835
1836 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1837
1838 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1839 @ifclear GENERIC
1840 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1841 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1842 @end ifclear
1843 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1844 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1845 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1846 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1847 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1848
1849 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1850 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1851 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1852 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1853 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1854 machine would assemble.
1855 @ifset VAX
1856 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1857 @end ifset
1858 @ifset M680X0
1859 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1860 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1861 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1862 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1863 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1864 @end ifset
1865
1866 @c man end
1867
1868 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1869 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1870 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1871
1872 @node Object Formats
1873 @section Object File Formats
1874
1875 @cindex object file format
1876 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1877 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1878 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1879 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1880 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1881 @ifclear GENERIC
1882 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1883 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1884 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1885 @end ifclear
1886 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1887 @ifset I960
1888 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1889 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1890 @end ifset
1891 @ifset HPPA
1892 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1893 SOM or ELF format object files.
1894 @end ifset
1895 @end ifclear
1896
1897 @node Command Line
1898 @section Command Line
1899
1900 @cindex command line conventions
1901
1902 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1903 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1904 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1905 significant.
1906
1907 @cindex standard input, as input file
1908 @kindex --
1909 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1910 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1911
1912 @cindex options, command line
1913 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1914 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1915 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1916 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1917 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1918
1919 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1920 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1921 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1922 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1923
1924 @smallexample
1925 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1926 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1927 @end smallexample
1928
1929 @node Input Files
1930 @section Input Files
1931
1932 @cindex input
1933 @cindex source program
1934 @cindex files, input
1935 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1936 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1937 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1938 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1939
1940 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1941 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1942 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1943 order specified.
1944
1945 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1946 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1947 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1948 (The standard input is also a file.)
1949
1950 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1951 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1952 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1953 is taken to be an input file name.
1954
1955 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1956 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1957 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1958 to assemble.
1959
1960 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1961 in your command line.
1962
1963 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1964 file.
1965
1966 @c man end
1967
1968 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1969
1970 @cindex input file linenumbers
1971 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1972 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1973 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1974 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1975 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1976
1977 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1978 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1979
1980 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1981 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1982 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1983 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1984 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1985 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1986
1987 @node Object
1988 @section Output (Object) File
1989
1990 @cindex object file
1991 @cindex output file
1992 @kindex a.out
1993 @kindex .o
1994 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1995 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1996 is the object file. Its default name is
1997 @ifclear BOUT
1998 @code{a.out}.
1999 @end ifclear
2000 @ifset BOUT
2001 @ifset GENERIC
2002 @code{a.out}, or
2003 @end ifset
2004 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
2005 @end ifset
2006 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2007 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2008 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2009 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2010 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2011
2012 @cindex linker
2013 @kindex ld
2014 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2015 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2016 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2017 information for the debugger.
2018
2019 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2020 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2021
2022 @node Errors
2023 @section Error and Warning Messages
2024
2025 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2026
2027 @cindex error messages
2028 @cindex warning messages
2029 @cindex messages from assembler
2030 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2031 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2032 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2033 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2034 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2035
2036 @c man end
2037
2038 @cindex format of warning messages
2039 Warning messages have the format
2040
2041 @smallexample
2042 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2043 @end smallexample
2044
2045 @noindent
2046 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2047 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2048 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2049 @ifset GENERIC
2050 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2051 @end ifset
2052 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2053 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2054 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2055
2056 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2057 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2058
2059 @smallexample
2060 .file 2 "bar.c"
2061 error_assembler_source
2062 .file "foo.c"
2063 .line 30
2064 error_c_source
2065 @end smallexample
2066
2067 produces this output:
2068
2069 @smallexample
2070 Assembler messages:
2071 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2072 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2073 @end smallexample
2074
2075 @cindex format of error messages
2076 Error messages have the format
2077
2078 @smallexample
2079 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2080 @end smallexample
2081
2082 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2083 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2084 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2085
2086 @node Invoking
2087 @chapter Command-Line Options
2088
2089 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2090 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2091 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2092 for options specific
2093 @ifclear GENERIC
2094 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2095 @end ifclear
2096 @ifset GENERIC
2097 to particular machine architectures.
2098 @end ifset
2099
2100 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2101
2102 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2103 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2104 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2105 by commas. For example:
2106
2107 @smallexample
2108 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2109 @end smallexample
2110
2111 @noindent
2112 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2113 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2114 local symbols in the symbol table).
2115
2116 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2117 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2118 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2119 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2120 assembler.)
2121
2122 @c man end
2123
2124 @menu
2125 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2126 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2127 * D:: -D for compatibility
2128 * f:: -f to work faster
2129 * I:: -I for .include search path
2130 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2131 * K:: -K for compatibility
2132 @end ifclear
2133 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2134 * K:: -K for difference tables
2135 @end ifset
2136
2137 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2138 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2139 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2140 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2141 * o:: -o to name the object file
2142 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2143 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2144 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2145 * v:: -v to announce version
2146 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2147 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2148 @end menu
2149
2150 @node a
2151 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2152
2153 @kindex -a
2154 @kindex -ac
2155 @kindex -ad
2156 @kindex -ag
2157 @kindex -ah
2158 @kindex -al
2159 @kindex -an
2160 @kindex -as
2161 @cindex listings, enabling
2162 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2163
2164 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2165 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2166 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2167 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2168 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2169 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2170 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2171 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2172 also.
2173
2174 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2175 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2176
2177 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2178 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2179 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2180 omitted from the listing.
2181
2182 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2183 listing.
2184
2185 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2186 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2187 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2188 @code{.sbttl}.
2189 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2190 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2191 listing-control directives have no effect.
2192
2193 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2194 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2195
2196 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2197 because it
2198 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2199 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2200 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2201 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2202 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2203
2204 @node alternate
2205 @section @option{--alternate}
2206
2207 @kindex --alternate
2208 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2209
2210 @node D
2211 @section @option{-D}
2212
2213 @kindex -D
2214 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2215 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2216 @command{@value{AS}}.
2217
2218 @node f
2219 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2220
2221 @kindex -f
2222 @cindex trusted compiler
2223 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2224 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2225 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2226 and comment preprocessing on
2227 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2228 ,Preprocessing}.
2229
2230 @quotation
2231 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2232 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2233 not work correctly.
2234 @end quotation
2235
2236 @node I
2237 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2238
2239 @kindex -I @var{path}
2240 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2241 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2242 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2243 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2244 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2245 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2246 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2247 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2248 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2249 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2250
2251 @node K
2252 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2253
2254 @kindex -K
2255 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2256 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2257 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2258 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2259 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2260 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2261 alteration on other platforms.
2262 @end ifclear
2263
2264 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2265 @cindex difference tables, warning
2266 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2267 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2268 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2269 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2270 is done.
2271 @end ifset
2272
2273 @node L
2274 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2275
2276 @kindex -L
2277 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2278 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2279 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2280 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2281 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2282 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2283 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2284 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2285
2286 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2287 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2288 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2289
2290 @node listing
2291 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2292
2293 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2294 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2295 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2296 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2297 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2298 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2299 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2300 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2301
2302 @table @gcctabopt
2303 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2304 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2305 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2306 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2307 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2308
2309 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2310 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2311 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2312 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2313 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2314 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2315 switch is used the default is to one.
2316
2317 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2318 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2319 @cindex Width of source line output
2320 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2321 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2322 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2323
2324 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2325 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2326 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2327 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2328 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2329 @end table
2330
2331 @node M
2332 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2333
2334 @kindex -M
2335 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2336 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2337 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2338 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2339 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2340 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2341 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2342 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2343 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2344
2345 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2346 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2347 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2348 individually. These are:
2349
2350 @itemize @bullet
2351 @item global symbols in common section
2352
2353 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2354 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2355 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2356 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2357 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2358
2359 @item complex relocations
2360
2361 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2362 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2363 are not support by other object file formats.
2364
2365 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2366
2367 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2368 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2369 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2370 script.
2371
2372 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2373
2374 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2375 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2376
2377 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2378
2379 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2380 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2381 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2382 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2383 assigned within a linker script.
2384 @end itemize
2385
2386 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2387 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2388 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2389
2390 @itemize @bullet
2391
2392 @item EBCDIC strings
2393
2394 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2395
2396 @item packed binary coded decimal
2397
2398 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2399 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2400
2401 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2402
2403 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2404
2405 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2406
2407 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2408
2409 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2410
2411 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2412 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2413 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2414 these options serve no purpose.
2415
2416 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2417
2418 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2419 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2420 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2421
2422 @item other @code{OPT} options
2423
2424 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2425 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2426
2427 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2428
2429 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2430 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2431
2432 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2433
2434 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2435
2436 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2437
2438 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2439
2440 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2441
2442 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2443
2444 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2445
2446 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2447
2448 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2449
2450 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2451
2452 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2453
2454 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2455
2456 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2457
2458 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2459
2460 @end itemize
2461
2462 @node MD
2463 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2464
2465 @kindex --MD
2466 @cindex dependency tracking
2467 @cindex make rules
2468
2469 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2470 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2471 dependencies of the main source file.
2472
2473 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2474
2475 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2476
2477 @node o
2478 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2479
2480 @kindex -o
2481 @cindex naming object file
2482 @cindex object file name
2483 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2484 default it has the name
2485 @ifset GENERIC
2486 @ifset I960
2487 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2488 @end ifset
2489 @ifclear I960
2490 @file{a.out}.
2491 @end ifclear
2492 @end ifset
2493 @ifclear GENERIC
2494 @ifset I960
2495 @file{b.out}.
2496 @end ifset
2497 @ifclear I960
2498 @file{a.out}.
2499 @end ifclear
2500 @end ifclear
2501 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2502 object file a different name.
2503
2504 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2505 existing file of the same name.
2506
2507 @node R
2508 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2509
2510 @kindex -R
2511 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2512 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2513 @cindex joining text and data sections
2514 @cindex merging text and data sections
2515 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2516 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2517 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2518 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2519 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2520 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2521
2522 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2523 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2524 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2525 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2526
2527 @ifset COFF-ELF
2528 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2529 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2530 @samp{.data}.
2531 @end ifset
2532
2533 @ifset HPPA
2534 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2535 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2536 @end ifset
2537
2538 @node statistics
2539 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2540
2541 @kindex --statistics
2542 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2543 @cindex time, total for assembly
2544 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2545 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2546 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2547 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2548 seconds).
2549
2550 @node traditional-format
2551 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2552
2553 @kindex --traditional-format
2554 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2555 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2556 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2557
2558 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2559 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2560
2561 @node v
2562 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2563
2564 @kindex -v
2565 @kindex -version
2566 @cindex assembler version
2567 @cindex version of assembler
2568 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2569 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2570 command line.
2571
2572 @node W
2573 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2574
2575 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2576 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2577 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2578 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2579
2580 @kindex -W
2581 @kindex --no-warn
2582 @cindex suppressing warnings
2583 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2584 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2585 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2586 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2587 are still reported.
2588
2589 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2590 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2591 @cindex warnings, causing error
2592 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2593 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2594
2595 @kindex --warn
2596 @cindex warnings, switching on
2597 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2598 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2599
2600 @node Z
2601 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2602 @cindex object file, after errors
2603 @cindex errors, continuing after
2604 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2605 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2606 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2607 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2608 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2609 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2610
2611 @node Syntax
2612 @chapter Syntax
2613
2614 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2615 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2616 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2617 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2618 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2619 @ifclear VAX
2620 assembler.
2621 @end ifclear
2622 @ifset VAX
2623 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2624 @end ifset
2625
2626 @menu
2627 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2628 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2629 * Comments:: Comments
2630 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2631 * Statements:: Statements
2632 * Constants:: Constants
2633 @end menu
2634
2635 @node Preprocessing
2636 @section Preprocessing
2637
2638 @cindex preprocessing
2639 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2640 @itemize @bullet
2641 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2642 @item
2643 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2644 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2645 a single space.
2646
2647 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2648 @item
2649 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2650 appropriate number of newlines.
2651
2652 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2653 @item
2654 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2655 @end itemize
2656
2657 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2658 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2659 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2660 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2661 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2662 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2663 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2664
2665 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2666 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2667 preprocessed.
2668
2669 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2670 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2671 @kindex #NO_APP
2672 @kindex #APP
2673 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2674 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2675 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2676 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2677 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2678 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2679 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2680 and whitespace.
2681
2682 @node Whitespace
2683 @section Whitespace
2684
2685 @cindex whitespace
2686 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2687 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2688 people to read. Unless within character constants
2689 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2690 as exactly one space.
2691
2692 @node Comments
2693 @section Comments
2694
2695 @cindex comments
2696 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2697 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2698
2699 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2700 This means you may not nest these comments.
2701
2702 @smallexample
2703 /*
2704 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2705 is to use this sort of comment.
2706 */
2707
2708 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2709 @end smallexample
2710
2711 @cindex line comment character
2712 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2713 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2714 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2715 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2716 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2717 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2718 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2719 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2720
2721 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2722 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2723 to specify logical line numbers:
2724
2725 @kindex #
2726 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2727 @cindex logical line numbers
2728 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2729 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2730 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2731 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2732 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2733
2734 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2735 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2736
2737 @smallexample
2738 # This is an ordinary comment.
2739 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2740 # This is logical line # 36.
2741 @end smallexample
2742 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2743 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2744
2745 @node Symbol Intro
2746 @section Symbols
2747
2748 @cindex characters used in symbols
2749 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2750 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2751 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2752 @samp{_.$}.
2753 @end ifclear
2754 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2755 @ifclear GENERIC
2756 @ifset H8
2757 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2758 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2759 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2760 symbol names.)
2761 @end ifset
2762 @end ifclear
2763 @end ifset
2764 @ifset GENERIC
2765 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2766 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2767 @end ifset
2768 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2769 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2770 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2771 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2772 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2773
2774 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2775 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2776 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2777 backslash @code{\} character.
2778 @cindex length of symbols
2779
2780 @node Statements
2781 @section Statements
2782
2783 @cindex statements, structure of
2784 @cindex line separator character
2785 @cindex statement separator character
2786
2787 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2788 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2789 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2790 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2791 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2792 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2793 exception: they do not end statements.
2794
2795 @cindex newline, required at file end
2796 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2797 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2798 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2799
2800 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2801
2802 @cindex instructions and directives
2803 @cindex directives and instructions
2804 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2805 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2806 @c 13feb91.
2807 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2808 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2809 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2810 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2811 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2812 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2813 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2814 @ifset GENERIC
2815 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2816 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2817 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2818 language.@refill
2819 @end ifset
2820
2821 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2822 @cindex label (@code{:})
2823 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2824 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2825 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2826
2827 @ifset HPPA
2828 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2829 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2830 only one label may be defined on each line.
2831 @end ifset
2832
2833 @smallexample
2834 label: .directive followed by something
2835 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2836 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2837 @end smallexample
2838
2839 @node Constants
2840 @section Constants
2841
2842 @cindex constants
2843 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2844 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2845 @smallexample
2846 @group
2847 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2848 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2849 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2850 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2851 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2852 @end group
2853 @end smallexample
2854
2855 @menu
2856 * Characters:: Character Constants
2857 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2858 @end menu
2859
2860 @node Characters
2861 @subsection Character Constants
2862
2863 @cindex character constants
2864 @cindex constants, character
2865 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2866 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2867 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2868 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2869 used in arithmetic expressions.
2870
2871 @menu
2872 * Strings:: Strings
2873 * Chars:: Characters
2874 @end menu
2875
2876 @node Strings
2877 @subsubsection Strings
2878
2879 @cindex string constants
2880 @cindex constants, string
2881 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2882 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2883 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2884 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2885 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2886 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2887 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2888 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2889
2890 @cindex escape codes, character
2891 @cindex character escape codes
2892 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
2893 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
2894 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
2895 @c NOTE: \initial {\\}
2896 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
2897 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
2898 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
2899 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
2900 @table @kbd
2901 @c @item \a
2902 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2903 @c
2904 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
2905 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2906 @item \b
2907 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2908
2909 @c @item \e
2910 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2911 @c
2912 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
2913 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2914 @item backslash-f
2915 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2916
2917 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
2918 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2919 @item \n
2920 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2921
2922 @c @item \p
2923 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2924 @c
2925 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
2926 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
2927 @item \r
2928 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2929
2930 @c @item \s
2931 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2932 @c other assemblers.
2933 @c
2934 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
2935 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2936 @item \t
2937 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2938
2939 @c @item \v
2940 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2941 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2942 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2943 @c
2944 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2945 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2946 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2947 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2948 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2949 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2950
2951 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2952 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2953 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2954 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2955 lower case @code{x} works.
2956
2957 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
2958 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2959 @item \\
2960 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2961
2962 @c @item \'
2963 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2964 @c This is needed in single character literals
2965 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2966 @c a @samp{'}.
2967 @c
2968 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
2969 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2970 @item \"
2971 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2972 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2973
2974 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2975 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2976 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2977 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2978 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2979 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2980 code and warns you of the fact.
2981 @end table
2982
2983 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2984 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2985 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2986 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2987 sequence.
2988
2989 @node Chars
2990 @subsubsection Characters
2991
2992 @cindex single character constant
2993 @cindex character, single
2994 @cindex constant, single character
2995 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2996 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2997 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2998 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2999 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
3000 grave accent. A newline
3001 @ifclear GENERIC
3002 @ifclear abnormal-separator
3003 (or semicolon @samp{;})
3004 @end ifclear
3005 @ifset abnormal-separator
3006 @ifset H8
3007 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3008 Renesas SH)
3009 @end ifset
3010 @end ifset
3011 @end ifclear
3012 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3013 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3014 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3015 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3016 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3017
3018 @node Numbers
3019 @subsection Number Constants
3020
3021 @cindex constants, number
3022 @cindex number constants
3023 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3024 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3025 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3026 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3027 are floating point numbers, described below.
3028
3029 @menu
3030 * Integers:: Integers
3031 * Bignums:: Bignums
3032 * Flonums:: Flonums
3033 @ifclear GENERIC
3034 @ifset I960
3035 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
3036 @end ifset
3037 @end ifclear
3038 @end menu
3039
3040 @node Integers
3041 @subsubsection Integers
3042 @cindex integers
3043 @cindex constants, integer
3044
3045 @cindex binary integers
3046 @cindex integers, binary
3047 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3048 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3049
3050 @cindex octal integers
3051 @cindex integers, octal
3052 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3053 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3054
3055 @cindex decimal integers
3056 @cindex integers, decimal
3057 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3058 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3059
3060 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3061 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3062 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3063 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3064
3065 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3066 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3067 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3068
3069 @node Bignums
3070 @subsubsection Bignums
3071
3072 @cindex bignums
3073 @cindex constants, bignum
3074 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3075 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3076 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3077 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3078
3079 @node Flonums
3080 @subsubsection Flonums
3081 @cindex flonums
3082 @cindex floating point numbers
3083 @cindex constants, floating point
3084
3085 @cindex precision, floating point
3086 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3087 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3088 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3089 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3090 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3091 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3092
3093 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3094 @itemize @bullet
3095 @item
3096 The digit @samp{0}.
3097 @ifset HPPA
3098 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3099 @end ifset
3100
3101 @item
3102 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3103 @ifset GENERIC
3104 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3105 @ignore
3106 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3107 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3108 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3109 @end ignore
3110
3111 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3112 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3113 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3114
3115 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3116 (in upper or lower case).
3117
3118 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3119 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3120
3121 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3122 @end ifset
3123 @ifclear GENERIC
3124 @ifset ARC
3125 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3126 @end ifset
3127 @ifset H8
3128 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3129 @end ifset
3130 @ifset HPPA
3131 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3132 @end ifset
3133 @ifset I960
3134 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3135 @end ifset
3136 @end ifclear
3137
3138 @item
3139 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3140
3141 @item
3142 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3143
3144 @item
3145 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3146 or more decimal digits.
3147
3148 @item
3149 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3150
3151 @itemize @bullet
3152 @item
3153 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3154 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3155 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3156 @item
3157 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3158 @item
3159 One or more decimal digits.
3160 @end itemize
3161
3162 @end itemize
3163
3164 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3165 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3166
3167 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3168 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3169 @command{@value{AS}}.
3170
3171 @ifclear GENERIC
3172 @ifset I960
3173 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3174 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3175 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3176 @node Bit Fields
3177 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3178
3179 @cindex bit fields
3180 @cindex constants, bit field
3181 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3182 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3183 @example
3184 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3185 @end example
3186 @noindent
3187 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3188 @var{value}.
3189
3190 The resulting number is then packed
3191 @ifset GENERIC
3192 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3193 (in host-dependent byte order)
3194 @end ifset
3195 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3196 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3197 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3198 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3199 least significant digits.@refill
3200
3201 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3202 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3203 @end ifset
3204 @end ifclear
3205
3206 @node Sections
3207 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3208 @cindex sections
3209 @cindex relocation
3210
3211 @menu
3212 * Secs Background:: Background
3213 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3214 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3215 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3216 * bss:: bss Section
3217 @end menu
3218
3219 @node Secs Background
3220 @section Background
3221
3222 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3223 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3224 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3225
3226 @cindex linker, and assembler
3227 @cindex assembler, and linker
3228 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3229 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3230 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3231 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3232 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3233 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3234 sections.
3235
3236 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3237 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3238 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3239 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3240 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3241 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3242 the proper run-time addresses.
3243 @ifset H8
3244 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3245 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3246 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3247 @end ifset
3248
3249 @cindex standard assembler sections
3250 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3251 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3252 @dfn{bss} sections.
3253
3254 @ifset COFF-ELF
3255 @ifset GENERIC
3256 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3257 @end ifset
3258 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3259 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3260 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3261 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3262 @end ifset
3263
3264 @ifset HPPA
3265 @ifset GENERIC
3266 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3267 @end ifset
3268 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3269 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3270 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3271 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3272 assembler directives.
3273
3274 @ifset SOM
3275 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3276 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3277 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3278 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3279 @end ifset
3280 @end ifset
3281
3282 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3283 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3284
3285 @ifset HPPA
3286 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3287 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3288 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3289 @end ifset
3290
3291 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3292 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3293 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3294 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3295 file is mentioned:
3296 @itemize @bullet
3297 @item
3298 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3299 an address?
3300 @item
3301 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3302 @item
3303 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3304 @display
3305 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3306 @end display
3307 @item
3308 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3309 @end itemize
3310
3311 @cindex addresses, format of
3312 @cindex section-relative addressing
3313 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3314 @display
3315 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3316 @end display
3317 @noindent
3318 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3319 nature.
3320 @ifset SOM
3321 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3322 symbol-relative instead.)
3323 @end ifset
3324
3325 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3326 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3327
3328 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3329 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3330 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3331 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3332 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3333 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3334 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3335 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3336 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3337
3338 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3339 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3340 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3341 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3342 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3343 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3344 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3345
3346 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3347 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3348 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3349 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3350 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3351 data and bss sections.
3352
3353 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3354 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3355
3356 @node Ld Sections
3357 @section Linker Sections
3358 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3359
3360 @table @strong
3361
3362 @ifset COFF-ELF
3363 @cindex named sections
3364 @cindex sections, named
3365 @item named sections
3366 @end ifset
3367 @ifset aout-bout
3368 @cindex text section
3369 @cindex data section
3370 @itemx text section
3371 @itemx data section
3372 @end ifset
3373 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3374 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3375 true of another.
3376 @c @ifset aout-bout
3377 When the program is running, however, it is
3378 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3379 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3380 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3381 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3382 in the data section.
3383 @c @end ifset
3384
3385 @cindex bss section
3386 @item bss section
3387 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3388 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3389 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3390 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3391 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3392 those explicit zeros from object files.
3393
3394 @cindex absolute section
3395 @item absolute section
3396 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3397 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3398 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3399 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3400
3401 @cindex undefined section
3402 @item undefined section
3403 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3404 the preceding sections.
3405 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3406 @end table
3407
3408 @cindex relocation example
3409 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3410 @ifset COFF-ELF
3411 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3412 @end ifset
3413 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3414
3415 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3416 @ifnottex
3417 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3418 @smallexample
3419 +-----+----+--+
3420 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3421 +-----+----+--+
3422
3423 text data bss
3424 seg. seg. seg.
3425
3426 +---+---+---+
3427 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3428 +---+---+---+
3429
3430 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3431 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3432 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3433
3434 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3435 @end smallexample
3436 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3437 @end ifnottex
3438 @need 5000
3439 @tex
3440 \bigskip
3441 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3442 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3443 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3444
3445 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3446 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3447 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3448
3449 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3450 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3451 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3452 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3453 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3454
3455 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3456 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3457
3458 @end tex
3459 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3460
3461 @node As Sections
3462 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3463
3464 @cindex internal assembler sections
3465 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3466 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3467 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3468 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3469 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3470 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3471 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3472 section-relative address.
3473
3474 @table @b
3475 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3476 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3477 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3478 bug in the assembler.
3479
3480 @cindex expr (internal section)
3481 @item expr section
3482 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3483 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3484 it in the expr section.
3485 @c FIXME item debug
3486 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3487 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3488 @c FIXME item register
3489 @end table
3490
3491 @node Sub-Sections
3492 @section Sub-Sections
3493
3494 @cindex numbered subsections
3495 @cindex grouping data
3496 @ifset aout-bout
3497 Assembled bytes
3498 @ifset COFF-ELF
3499 conventionally
3500 @end ifset
3501 fall into two sections: text and data.
3502 @end ifset
3503 You may have separate groups of
3504 @ifset GENERIC
3505 data in named sections
3506 @end ifset
3507 @ifclear GENERIC
3508 @ifclear aout-bout
3509 data in named sections
3510 @end ifclear
3511 @ifset aout-bout
3512 text or data
3513 @end ifset
3514 @end ifclear
3515 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3516 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3517 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3518 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3519 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3520 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3521 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3522 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3523 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3524 constants being output.
3525
3526 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3527 goes in subsection number zero.
3528
3529 @ifset GENERIC
3530 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3531 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3532 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3533 @end ifset
3534 @ifclear GENERIC
3535 @ifset H8
3536 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3537 boundary (two bytes).
3538 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3539 @end ifset
3540 @ifset I960
3541 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3542 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3543 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3544 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3545 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3546 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3547 @end ifset
3548 @end ifclear
3549
3550 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3551 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3552 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3553 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3554 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3555 data subsections as a data section.
3556
3557 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3558 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3559 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3560 @ifset COFF
3561 @ifset GENERIC
3562 When generating COFF output, you
3563 @end ifset
3564 @ifclear GENERIC
3565 You
3566 @end ifclear
3567 can also use an extra subsection
3568 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3569 @var{expression}}.
3570 @end ifset
3571 @ifset ELF
3572 @ifset GENERIC
3573 When generating ELF output, you
3574 @end ifset
3575 @ifclear GENERIC
3576 You
3577 @end ifclear
3578 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3579 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3580 @end ifset
3581 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3582 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3583 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3584 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3585 @smallexample
3586 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3587 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3588 .text 1
3589 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3590 .data 0
3591 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3592 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3593 .text 0
3594 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3595 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3596 @end smallexample
3597
3598 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3599 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3600 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3601 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3602 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3603 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3604 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3605
3606 @node bss
3607 @section bss Section
3608
3609 @cindex bss section
3610 @cindex common variable storage
3611 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3612 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3613 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3614 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3615 section are zeroed bytes.
3616
3617 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3618 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3619
3620 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3621 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3622
3623 @ifset GENERIC
3624 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3625 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3626 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3627 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3628 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3629 @end ifset
3630
3631 @node Symbols
3632 @chapter Symbols
3633
3634 @cindex symbols
3635 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3636 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3637 to debug.
3638
3639 @quotation
3640 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3641 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3642 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3643 @end quotation
3644
3645 @menu
3646 * Labels:: Labels
3647 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3648 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3649 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3650 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3651 @end menu
3652
3653 @node Labels
3654 @section Labels
3655
3656 @cindex labels
3657 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3658 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3659 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3660 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3661 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3662 definitions.
3663
3664 @ifset HPPA
3665 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3666 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3667 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3668 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3669 @end ifset
3670
3671 @node Setting Symbols
3672 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3673
3674 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3675 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3676 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3677 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3678 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3679 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3680 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3681 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3682
3683 @ifset Blackfin
3684 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3685 @end ifset
3686
3687 @node Symbol Names
3688 @section Symbol Names
3689
3690 @cindex symbol names
3691 @cindex names, symbol
3692 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3693 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3694 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3695 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3696 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3697 particular target machine), and underscores.
3698 @end ifclear
3699 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3700 @ifset H8
3701 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3702 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3703 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3704 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3705 @end ifset
3706 @end ifset
3707
3708 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3709 than @code{Foo}.
3710
3711 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3712 Local Labels. See below.
3713
3714 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3715 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3716 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3717 currently supported.
3718
3719 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3720 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3721 in a program.
3722
3723 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3724
3725 @cindex local symbol names
3726 @cindex symbol names, local
3727 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3728 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3729 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3730 set of local label prefixes.
3731 @ifset HPPA
3732 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3733 @end ifset
3734
3735 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3736 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3737 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3738 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3739
3740 @subheading Local Labels
3741
3742 @cindex local labels
3743 @cindex temporary symbol names
3744 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3745 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3746 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3747 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3748 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3749 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3750 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3751 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3752 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3753 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3754
3755 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3756 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3757 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3758 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3759 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3760 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3761 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3762
3763 Here is an example:
3764
3765 @smallexample
3766 1: branch 1f
3767 2: branch 1b
3768 1: branch 2f
3769 2: branch 1b
3770 @end smallexample
3771
3772 Which is the equivalent of:
3773
3774 @smallexample
3775 label_1: branch label_3
3776 label_2: branch label_1
3777 label_3: branch label_4
3778 label_4: branch label_3
3779 @end smallexample
3780
3781 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3782 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3783 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3784 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3785 these parts:
3786
3787 @table @code
3788 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3789 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3790 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3791 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3792 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3793 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3794 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3795 you may use them in debugging.
3796
3797 @item @var{number}
3798 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3799 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3800
3801 @item @kbd{C-B}
3802 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3803 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3804
3805 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3806 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3807 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3808 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3809 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3810 @end table
3811
3812 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3813 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3814
3815 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3816 @cindex dollar local symbols
3817
3818 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3819 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3820 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3821 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3822 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3823 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3824
3825 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3826 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3827 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3828
3829 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3830 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3831 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3832 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3833
3834 @node Dot
3835 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3836
3837 @cindex dot (symbol)
3838 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3839 @cindex current address
3840 @cindex location counter
3841 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3842 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3843 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3844 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3845 directive.
3846 @ifclear no-space-dir
3847 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3848 @samp{.space 4}.
3849 @end ifclear
3850
3851 @node Symbol Attributes
3852 @section Symbol Attributes
3853
3854 @cindex symbol attributes
3855 @cindex attributes, symbol
3856 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3857 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3858 attributes.
3859 @ifset INTERNALS
3860 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3861 @end ifset
3862
3863 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3864 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3865 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3866 would want.
3867
3868 @menu
3869 * Symbol Value:: Value
3870 * Symbol Type:: Type
3871 @ifset aout-bout
3872 @ifset GENERIC
3873 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3874 @end ifset
3875 @ifclear GENERIC
3876 @ifclear BOUT
3877 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3878 @end ifclear
3879 @ifset BOUT
3880 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3881 @end ifset
3882 @end ifclear
3883 @end ifset
3884 @ifset COFF
3885 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3886 @end ifset
3887 @ifset SOM
3888 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3889 @end ifset
3890 @end menu
3891
3892 @node Symbol Value
3893 @subsection Value
3894
3895 @cindex value of a symbol
3896 @cindex symbol value
3897 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3898 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3899 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3900 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3901 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3902 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3903 called absolute.
3904
3905 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3906 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3907 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3908 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3909 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3910 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3911 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3912 allocated storage.
3913
3914 @node Symbol Type
3915 @subsection Type
3916
3917 @cindex type of a symbol
3918 @cindex symbol type
3919 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3920 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3921 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3922 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3923
3924 @ifset aout-bout
3925 @ifclear GENERIC
3926 @ifset BOUT
3927 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3928 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3929 @need 1000
3930 @node a.out Symbols
3931 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3932
3933 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3934 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3935 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3936 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3937 @code{b.out}.
3938
3939 @end ifset
3940 @ifclear BOUT
3941 @node a.out Symbols
3942 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3943
3944 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3945 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3946
3947 @end ifclear
3948 @end ifclear
3949 @ifset GENERIC
3950 @node a.out Symbols
3951 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3952
3953 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3954 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3955
3956 @end ifset
3957 @menu
3958 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3959 * Symbol Other:: Other
3960 @end menu
3961
3962 @node Symbol Desc
3963 @subsubsection Descriptor
3964
3965 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3966 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3967 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3968 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3969 @command{@value{AS}}.
3970
3971 @node Symbol Other
3972 @subsubsection Other
3973
3974 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3975 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3976 @end ifset
3977
3978 @ifset COFF
3979 @node COFF Symbols
3980 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3981
3982 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3983 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3984
3985 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3986 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3987 @code{.endef} directives.
3988
3989 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3990
3991 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3992 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3993 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3994
3995 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3996
3997 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3998 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3999 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4000 table information for COFF.
4001 @end ifset
4002
4003 @ifset SOM
4004 @node SOM Symbols
4005 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4006
4007 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
4008 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4009
4010 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4011 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4012
4013 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4014 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4015 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4016 @end ifset
4017
4018 @node Expressions
4019 @chapter Expressions
4020
4021 @cindex expressions
4022 @cindex addresses
4023 @cindex numeric values
4024 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4025 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4026
4027 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4028 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4029 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4030 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4031 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4032 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4033
4034 @menu
4035 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4036 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4037 @end menu
4038
4039 @node Empty Exprs
4040 @section Empty Expressions
4041
4042 @cindex empty expressions
4043 @cindex expressions, empty
4044 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4045 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4046 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4047 is compatible with other assemblers.
4048
4049 @node Integer Exprs
4050 @section Integer Expressions
4051
4052 @cindex integer expressions
4053 @cindex expressions, integer
4054 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4055 by @emph{operators}.
4056
4057 @menu
4058 * Arguments:: Arguments
4059 * Operators:: Operators
4060 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4061 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4062 @end menu
4063
4064 @node Arguments
4065 @subsection Arguments
4066
4067 @cindex expression arguments
4068 @cindex arguments in expressions
4069 @cindex operands in expressions
4070 @cindex arithmetic operands
4071 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4072 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4073 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4074 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4075 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4076 instruction operands.
4077
4078 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4079 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4080 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4081 integer.
4082
4083 Numbers are usually integers.
4084
4085 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4086 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4087 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4088 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4089 assemblers.
4090
4091 @cindex subexpressions
4092 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4093 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4094 operator followed by an argument.
4095
4096 @node Operators
4097 @subsection Operators
4098
4099 @cindex operators, in expressions
4100 @cindex arithmetic functions
4101 @cindex functions, in expressions
4102 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4103 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4104 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4105 whitespace.
4106
4107 @node Prefix Ops
4108 @subsection Prefix Operator
4109
4110 @cindex prefix operators
4111 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4112 one argument, which must be absolute.
4113
4114 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4115 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4116 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4117 @tex
4118 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4119 @end tex
4120
4121 @table @code
4122 @item -
4123 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4124 @item ~
4125 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4126 @end table
4127
4128 @tex
4129 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4130 @end tex
4131
4132 @node Infix Ops
4133 @subsection Infix Operators
4134
4135 @cindex infix operators
4136 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4137 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4138 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4139 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4140 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4141
4142 @enumerate
4143 @cindex operator precedence
4144 @cindex precedence of operators
4145
4146 @item
4147 Highest Precedence
4148
4149 @table @code
4150 @item *
4151 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4152
4153 @item /
4154 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4155
4156 @item %
4157 @dfn{Remainder}.
4158
4159 @item <<
4160 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4161
4162 @item >>
4163 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4164 @end table
4165
4166 @item
4167 Intermediate precedence
4168
4169 @table @code
4170 @item |
4171
4172 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4173
4174 @item &
4175 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4176
4177 @item ^
4178 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4179
4180 @item !
4181 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4182 @end table
4183
4184 @item
4185 Low Precedence
4186
4187 @table @code
4188 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4189 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4190 @cindex arguments for addition
4191 @item +
4192 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4193 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4194 sections.
4195
4196 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4197 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4198 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4199 @item -
4200 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4201 result has the section of the left argument.
4202 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4203 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4204 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4205
4206 @cindex comparison expressions
4207 @cindex expressions, comparison
4208 @item ==
4209 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4210 @item <>
4211 @itemx !=
4212 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4213 @item <
4214 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4215 @item >
4216 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4217 @item >=
4218 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4219 @item <=
4220 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4221
4222 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4223 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4224 perform signed comparisons.
4225 @end table
4226
4227 @item Lowest Precedence
4228
4229 @table @code
4230 @item &&
4231 @dfn{Logical And}.
4232
4233 @item ||
4234 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4235
4236 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4237 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4238 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4239 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4240
4241 @end table
4242 @end enumerate
4243
4244 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4245 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4246
4247 @node Pseudo Ops
4248 @chapter Assembler Directives
4249
4250 @cindex directives, machine independent
4251 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4252 @cindex machine independent directives
4253 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4254 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4255 in lower case.
4256
4257 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4258 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4259 @ifset GENERIC
4260 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4261 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4262 @end ifset
4263 @ifclear GENERIC
4264 @ifset machine-directives
4265 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4266 @end ifset
4267 @end ifclear
4268
4269 @menu
4270 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4271 @ifset COFF
4272 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4273 @end ifset
4274
4275 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4276 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4277 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4278 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4279 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4280 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4281 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4282 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4283 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4284 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4285 @ifset COFF
4286 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4287 @end ifset
4288 @ifset aout-bout
4289 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4290 @end ifset
4291 @ifset COFF
4292 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4293 @end ifset
4294
4295 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4296 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4297 * Else:: @code{.else}
4298 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4299 * End:: @code{.end}
4300 @ifset COFF
4301 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4302 @end ifset
4303
4304 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4305 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4306 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4307 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4308 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4309 * Err:: @code{.err}
4310 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4311 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4312 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4313 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4314 * File:: @code{.file}
4315 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4316 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4317 * Func:: @code{.func}
4318 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4319 @ifset ELF
4320 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4321 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4322 @end ifset
4323
4324 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4325 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4326 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4327 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4328 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4329 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4330 @ifset ELF
4331 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4332 @end ifset
4333
4334 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4335 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4336 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4337 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4338 @ifclear no-line-dir
4339 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4340 @end ifclear
4341
4342 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4343 * List:: @code{.list}
4344 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4345 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4346 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4347 @ifset ELF
4348 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4349 @end ifset
4350
4351 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4352 @ignore
4353 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4354 @end ignore
4355
4356 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4357 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4358 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4359 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4360 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4361 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4362 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4363 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4364 @ifset ELF
4365 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4366 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4367 @end ifset
4368
4369 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4370 @ifset ELF
4371 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4372 @end ifset
4373
4374 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4375 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4376 @ifset ELF
4377 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4378 @end ifset
4379
4380 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4381 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4382 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4383 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4384 @ifset COFF
4385 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4386 @end ifset
4387 @ifset COFF-ELF
4388 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4389 @end ifset
4390
4391 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4392 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4393 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4394 @ifset COFF-ELF
4395 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4396 @end ifset
4397 @ifclear no-space-dir
4398 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4399 @end ifclear
4400
4401 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4402 @ifclear no-space-dir
4403 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4404 @end ifclear
4405 @ifset have-stabs
4406 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4407 @end ifset
4408
4409 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4410 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4411 @ifset ELF
4412 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4413 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4414 @end ifset
4415
4416 @ifset COFF
4417 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4418 @end ifset
4419
4420 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4421 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4422 @ifset COFF-ELF
4423 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4424 @end ifset
4425
4426 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4427 @ifset COFF
4428 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4429 @end ifset
4430
4431 @ifset ELF
4432 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4433 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4434 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4435 @end ifset
4436
4437 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4438 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4439 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4440 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4441 @ifclear no-space-dir
4442 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4443 @end ifclear
4444 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4445 @end menu
4446
4447 @node Abort
4448 @section @code{.abort}
4449
4450 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4451 @cindex stopping the assembly
4452 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4453 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4454 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4455 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4456 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4457
4458 @ifset COFF
4459 @node ABORT (COFF)
4460 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4461
4462 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4463 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4464 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4465
4466 @ifset BOUT
4467 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4468 but ignores it.
4469 @end ifset
4470 @end ifset
4471
4472 @node Align
4473 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4474
4475 @cindex padding the location counter
4476 @cindex @code{align} directive
4477 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4478 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4479 required, as described below.
4480
4481 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4482 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4483 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4484 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4485 with no-op instructions.
4486
4487 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4488 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4489 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4490 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4491 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4492 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4493 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4494
4495 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4496 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4497 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4498 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4499 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4500 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4501 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4502
4503 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4504 strongarm, it is the
4505 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4506 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4507 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4508 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4509
4510 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4511 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4512 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4513 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4514 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4515
4516 @node Altmacro
4517 @section @code{.altmacro}
4518 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4519
4520 @ftable @code
4521 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4522 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4523 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4524 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4525 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4526 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4527 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4528
4529 @item String delimiters
4530 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4531 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4532
4533 @table @code
4534 @item '@var{string}'
4535 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4536
4537 @item <@var{string}>
4538 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4539 @end table
4540
4541 @item single-character string escape
4542 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4543 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4544 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4545 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4546
4547 @item Expression results as strings
4548 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4549 and use the result as a string.
4550 @end ftable
4551
4552 @node Ascii
4553 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4554
4555 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4556 @cindex string literals
4557 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4558 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4559 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4560
4561 @node Asciz
4562 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4563
4564 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4565 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4566 @cindex null-terminated strings
4567 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4568 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4569
4570 @node Balign
4571 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4572
4573 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4574 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4575 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4576 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4577 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4578 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4579 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4580
4581 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4582 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4583 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4584 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4585 with no-op instructions.
4586
4587 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4588 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4589 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4590 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4591 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4592 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4593 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4594
4595 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4596 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4597 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4598 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4599 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4600 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4601 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4602 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4603 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4604 undefined.
4605
4606 @node Bundle directives
4607 @section Bundle directives
4608 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4609 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4610 @cindex bundle
4611 @cindex instruction bundle
4612 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4613 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4614 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4615 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4616 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4617 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4618 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4619
4620 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4621 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4622 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4623 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4624 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4625 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4626 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4627 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4628 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4629 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4630 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4631
4632 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4633 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4634 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4635 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4636 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4637 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4638 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4639 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4640 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4641
4642 @cindex bundle-locked
4643 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4644 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4645 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4646 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4647 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4648 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4649 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4650 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4651 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4652 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4653 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4654 bundle size.
4655
4656 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4657 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4658 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4659 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4660 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4661 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4662
4663 @node Byte
4664 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4665
4666 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4667 @cindex integers, one byte
4668 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4669 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4670
4671 @node CFI directives
4672 @section CFI directives
4673 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4674 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4675 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4676 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4677 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4678 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4679 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4680 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4681
4682 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4683 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4684
4685 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4686 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4687 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4688 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4689 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4690 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4691
4692 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4693 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4694
4695 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4696 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4697 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4698 unwind entry previously opened by
4699 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4700
4701 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4702 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4703 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4704 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4705 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4706 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4707 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4708 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4709 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4710 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4711 no personality routine.
4712
4713 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4714 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4715 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4716 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4717 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4718 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4719
4720 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4721 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4722 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4723 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4724 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4725 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4726 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4727 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4728
4729 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4730 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4731 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4732 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4733 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4734 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4735 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4736
4737 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4738 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4739 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4740 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4741 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4742 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4743
4744 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4745 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4746 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4747 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4748 by a section directive.
4749
4750 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4751 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4752 @code{.p2align} directive.
4753
4754 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4755 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4756 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4757
4758 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4759 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4760 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4761 remains the same.
4762
4763 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4764 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4765 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4766 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4767 CFA address.
4768
4769 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4770 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4771 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4772
4773 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4774 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4775 CFA.
4776
4777 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4778 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4779 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4780 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4781 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4782 code it's annotating.
4783
4784 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4785 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4786
4787 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4788 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4789 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4790 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4791
4792 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4793 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4794
4795 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4796 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4797 i.e. no restoration needed.
4798
4799 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4800 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4801 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4802 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4803 the previous saved state.
4804
4805 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4806 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4807 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4808
4809 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4810 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4811
4812 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4813 SPARC register window has been saved.
4814
4815 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4816 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4817 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4818 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4819
4820 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4821 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4822 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4823 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4824
4825 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4826 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4827 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4828 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4829 or another register.
4830
4831 @node Comm
4832 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4833
4834 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4835 @cindex symbol, common
4836 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4837 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4838 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4839 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4840 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4841 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4842 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4843 using the largest size.
4844
4845 @ifset COFF-ELF
4846 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4847 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4848 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4849 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4850 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4851 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4852 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4853 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4854 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4855 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4856 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4857 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4858 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4859 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4860 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4861 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4862 @end ifset
4863
4864 @ifset HPPA
4865 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4866 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4867 @end ifset
4868
4869 @node Data
4870 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4871
4872 @cindex @code{data} directive
4873 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4874 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4875 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4876 to zero.
4877
4878 @ifset COFF
4879 @node Def
4880 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4881
4882 @cindex @code{def} directive
4883 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4884 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4885 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4886 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4887 @ifset BOUT
4888
4889 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4890 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4891 but ignored.
4892 @end ifset
4893 @end ifset
4894
4895 @ifset aout-bout
4896 @node Desc
4897 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4898
4899 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4900 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4901 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4902 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4903 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4904
4905 @ifset COFF
4906 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4907 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4908 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4909 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4910 @end ifset
4911 @end ifset
4912
4913 @ifset COFF
4914 @node Dim
4915 @section @code{.dim}
4916
4917 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4918 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4919 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4920 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4921 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4922 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4923 @ifset BOUT
4924
4925 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4926 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4927 ignores it.
4928 @end ifset
4929 @end ifset
4930
4931 @node Double
4932 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4933
4934 @cindex @code{double} directive
4935 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4936 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4937 assembles floating point numbers.
4938 @ifset GENERIC
4939 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4940 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4941 @end ifset
4942 @ifclear GENERIC
4943 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4944 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4945 in @sc{ieee} format.
4946 @end ifset
4947 @end ifclear
4948
4949 @node Eject
4950 @section @code{.eject}
4951
4952 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4953 @cindex new page, in listings
4954 @cindex page, in listings
4955 @cindex listing control: new page
4956 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4957
4958 @node Else
4959 @section @code{.else}
4960
4961 @cindex @code{else} directive
4962 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4963 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4964 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4965 was false.
4966
4967 @node Elseif
4968 @section @code{.elseif}
4969
4970 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4971 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4972 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4973 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4974
4975 @node End
4976 @section @code{.end}
4977
4978 @cindex @code{end} directive
4979 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4980 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4981
4982 @ifset COFF
4983 @node Endef
4984 @section @code{.endef}
4985
4986 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4987 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4988 @code{.def}.
4989 @ifset BOUT
4990
4991 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4992 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4993 directive but ignores it.
4994 @end ifset
4995 @end ifset
4996
4997 @node Endfunc
4998 @section @code{.endfunc}
4999 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5000 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5001
5002 @node Endif
5003 @section @code{.endif}
5004
5005 @cindex @code{endif} directive
5006 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5007 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5008 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5009
5010 @node Equ
5011 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5012
5013 @cindex @code{equ} directive
5014 @cindex assigning values to symbols
5015 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
5016 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5017 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5018
5019 @ifset HPPA
5020 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5021 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5022 @end ifset
5023
5024 @ifset Z80
5025 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5026 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5027 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5028 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5029 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5030 @end ifset
5031
5032 @node Equiv
5033 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5034 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5035 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5036 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5037 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5038 undefined.
5039
5040 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5041 @smallexample
5042 .ifdef SYM
5043 .err
5044 .endif
5045 .equ SYM,VAL
5046 @end smallexample
5047 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5048
5049 @node Eqv
5050 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5051 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5052 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5053 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5054 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5055 value is taken.
5056
5057 @node Err
5058 @section @code{.err}
5059 @cindex @code{err} directive
5060 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5061 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5062 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5063
5064 @node Error
5065 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5066 @cindex error directive
5067
5068 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5069 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5070 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5071 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5072
5073 @smallexample
5074 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5075 @end smallexample
5076
5077 @node Exitm
5078 @section @code{.exitm}
5079 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5080
5081 @node Extern
5082 @section @code{.extern}
5083
5084 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5085 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5086 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5087 all undefined symbols as external.
5088
5089 @node Fail
5090 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5091
5092 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5093 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5094 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5095 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5096 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5097 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5098
5099 @node File
5100 @section @code{.file}
5101 @cindex @code{file} directive
5102
5103 @ifclear no-file-dir
5104 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5105 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5106 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5107
5108 @subheading Default Version
5109
5110 @cindex logical file name
5111 @cindex file name, logical
5112 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5113 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5114
5115 @smallexample
5116 .file @var{string}
5117 @end smallexample
5118
5119 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5120 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5121 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5122 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5123 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5124
5125 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5126 @end ifclear
5127
5128 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5129 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5130
5131 @smallexample
5132 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5133 @end smallexample
5134
5135 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5136 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5137 literal.
5138
5139 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5140 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5141 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5142 entries will have.
5143
5144 @node Fill
5145 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5146
5147 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5148 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5149 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5150 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5151 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5152 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5153 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5154 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5155 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5156 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5157 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5158 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5159 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5160 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5161
5162 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5163 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5164 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5165 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5166
5167 @node Float
5168 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5169
5170 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5171 @cindex @code{float} directive
5172 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5173 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5174 @ifset GENERIC
5175 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5176 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5177 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5178 @end ifset
5179 @ifclear GENERIC
5180 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5181 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5182 in @sc{ieee} format.
5183 @end ifset
5184 @end ifclear
5185
5186 @node Func
5187 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5188 @cindex @code{func} directive
5189 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5190 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5191 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5192 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5193 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5194 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5195 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5196 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5197
5198 @node Global
5199 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5200
5201 @cindex @code{global} directive
5202 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5203 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5204 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5205 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5206 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5207 from another file linked into the same program.
5208
5209 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5210 compatibility with other assemblers.
5211
5212 @ifset HPPA
5213 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5214 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5215 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5216 @end ifset
5217
5218 @ifset ELF
5219 @node Gnu_attribute
5220 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5221 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5222
5223 @node Hidden
5224 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5225
5226 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5227 @cindex visibility
5228 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5229 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5230 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5231
5232 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5233 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5234 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5235 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5236 @end ifset
5237
5238 @node hword
5239 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5240
5241 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5242 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5243 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5244 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5245 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5246 a 16 bit number for each.
5247
5248 @ifset GENERIC
5249 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5250 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5251 @end ifset
5252 @ifclear GENERIC
5253 @ifset W32
5254 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5255 @end ifset
5256 @ifset W16
5257 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5258 @end ifset
5259 @end ifclear
5260
5261 @node Ident
5262 @section @code{.ident}
5263
5264 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5265
5266 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5267 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5268 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5269 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5270 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5271 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5272 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5273
5274 @node If
5275 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5276
5277 @cindex conditional assembly
5278 @cindex @code{if} directive
5279 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5280 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5281 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5282 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5283 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5284 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5285 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5286 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5287
5288 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5289 @table @code
5290 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5291 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5292 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5293 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5294 is considered to be undefined.
5295
5296 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5297 @item .ifb @var{text}
5298 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5299
5300 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5301 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5302 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5303 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5304 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5305 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5306 string comparison is case sensitive.
5307
5308 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5309 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5310 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5311
5312 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5313 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5314 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5315
5316 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5317 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5318 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5319 equal to zero.
5320
5321 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5322 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5323 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5324
5325 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5326 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5327 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5328 to zero.
5329
5330 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5331 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5332 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5333
5334 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5335 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5336 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5337 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5338
5339 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5340 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5341 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5342 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5343
5344 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5345 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5346 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5347 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5348 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5349 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5350 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5351
5352 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5353 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5354 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5355 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5356
5357 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5358 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5359 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5360 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5361 @end table
5362
5363 @node Incbin
5364 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5365
5366 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5367 @cindex binary files, including
5368 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5369 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5370 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5371 around @var{file}.
5372
5373 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5374 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5375 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5376 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5377 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5378
5379 @node Include
5380 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5381
5382 @cindex @code{include} directive
5383 @cindex supporting files, including
5384 @cindex files, including
5385 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5386 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5387 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5388 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5389 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5390 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5391 around @var{file}.
5392
5393 @node Int
5394 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5395
5396 @cindex @code{int} directive
5397 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5398 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5399 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5400 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5401 of target the assembly is for.
5402
5403 @ifclear GENERIC
5404 @ifset H8
5405 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5406 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5407 32-bit integers.
5408 @end ifset
5409 @end ifclear
5410
5411 @ifset ELF
5412 @node Internal
5413 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5414
5415 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5416 @cindex visibility
5417 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5418 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5419 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5420
5421 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5422 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5423 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5424 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5425 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5426 @end ifset
5427
5428 @node Irp
5429 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5430
5431 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5432 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5433 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5434 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5435 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5436 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5437 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5438 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5439
5440 For example, assembling
5441
5442 @example
5443 .irp param,1,2,3
5444 move d\param,sp@@-
5445 .endr
5446 @end example
5447
5448 is equivalent to assembling
5449
5450 @example
5451 move d1,sp@@-
5452 move d2,sp@@-
5453 move d3,sp@@-
5454 @end example
5455
5456 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5457
5458 @node Irpc
5459 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5460
5461 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5462 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5463 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5464 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5465 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5466 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5467 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5468 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5469
5470 For example, assembling
5471
5472 @example
5473 .irpc param,123
5474 move d\param,sp@@-
5475 .endr
5476 @end example
5477
5478 is equivalent to assembling
5479
5480 @example
5481 move d1,sp@@-
5482 move d2,sp@@-
5483 move d3,sp@@-
5484 @end example
5485
5486 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5487 at @xref{Macro}.
5488
5489 @node Lcomm
5490 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5491
5492 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5493 @cindex local common symbols
5494 @cindex symbols, local common
5495 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5496 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5497 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5498 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5499 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5500 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5501
5502 @ifset GENERIC
5503 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5504 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5505 @end ifset
5506
5507 @ifset HPPA
5508 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5509 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5510 @end ifset
5511
5512 @node Lflags
5513 @section @code{.lflags}
5514
5515 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5516 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5517 assemblers, but ignores it.
5518
5519 @ifclear no-line-dir
5520 @node Line
5521 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5522
5523 @cindex @code{line} directive
5524 @cindex logical line number
5525 @ifset aout-bout
5526 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5527 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5528 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5529 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5530 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5531 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5532 @end ifset
5533
5534 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5535 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5536 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5537 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5538 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5539
5540 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5541 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5542 debugging.
5543 @end ifclear
5544
5545 @node Linkonce
5546 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5547 @cindex COMDAT
5548 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5549 @cindex common sections
5550 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5551 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5552 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5553 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5554 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5555 unique.
5556
5557 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5558 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5559 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5560
5561 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5562 following strings. For example:
5563 @smallexample
5564 .linkonce same_size
5565 @end smallexample
5566 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5567
5568 @table @code
5569 @item discard
5570 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5571
5572 @item one_only
5573 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5574
5575 @item same_size
5576 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5577
5578 @item same_contents
5579 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5580 @end table
5581
5582 @node List
5583 @section @code{.list}
5584
5585 @cindex @code{list} directive
5586 @cindex listing control, turning on
5587 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5588 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5589 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5590 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5591 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5592
5593 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5594 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5595 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5596
5597 @node Ln
5598 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5599
5600 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5601 @ifclear no-line-dir
5602 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5603 @end ifclear
5604 @ifset no-line-dir
5605 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5606 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5607 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5608 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5609 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5610 @ifset BOUT
5611
5612 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5613 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5614 output format.
5615 @end ifset
5616 @end ifset
5617
5618 @node Loc
5619 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5620 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5621 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5622 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5623 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5624 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5625 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5626 the row is added.
5627
5628 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5629
5630 @table @code
5631 @item basic_block
5632 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5633 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5634
5635 @item prologue_end
5636 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5637 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5638
5639 @item epilogue_begin
5640 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5641 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5642
5643 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5644 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5645 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5646 either 0 or 1.
5647
5648 @item isa @var{value}
5649 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5650 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5651
5652 @item discriminator @var{value}
5653 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5654 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5655
5656 @end table
5657
5658 @node Loc_mark_labels
5659 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5660 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5661 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5662 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5663 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5664 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5665 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5666 this function respectively.
5667
5668 @ifset ELF
5669 @node Local
5670 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5671
5672 @cindex @code{local} directive
5673 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5674 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5675 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5676 they will be created.
5677
5678 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5679 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5680 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5681 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5682 @end ifset
5683
5684 @node Long
5685 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5686
5687 @cindex @code{long} directive
5688 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5689
5690 @ignore
5691 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5692 @c what it really ought to do
5693 @node Lsym
5694 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5695
5696 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5697 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5698 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5699 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5700 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5701 the same as the expression value:
5702 @smallexample
5703 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5704 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5705 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5706 @end smallexample
5707 @noindent
5708 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5709 @end ignore
5710
5711 @node Macro
5712 @section @code{.macro}
5713
5714 @cindex macros
5715 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5716 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5717 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5718
5719 @example
5720 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5721 .long \from
5722 .if \to-\from
5723 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5724 .endif
5725 .endm
5726 @end example
5727
5728 @noindent
5729 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5730
5731 @example
5732 .long 0
5733 .long 1
5734 .long 2
5735 .long 3
5736 .long 4
5737 .long 5
5738 @end example
5739
5740 @ftable @code
5741 @item .macro @var{macname}
5742 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5743 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5744 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5745 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5746 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5747 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5748 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5749 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5750 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5751 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5752 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5753 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5754
5755 @table @code
5756 @item .macro comm
5757 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5758 arguments.
5759
5760 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5761 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5762 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5763 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5764 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5765
5766 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5767 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5768 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5769 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5770 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5771 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5772 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5773 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5774
5775 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5776 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5777 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5778 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5779 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5780
5781 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5782 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5783 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5784
5785 @end table
5786
5787 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5788 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5789 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5790 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5791 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5792 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5793 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5794 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5795 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5796 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5797 this macro definition:
5798
5799 @example
5800 .macro label l
5801 \l:
5802 .endm
5803 @end example
5804
5805 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5806 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5807 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5808 identifier.
5809
5810 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5811 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5812 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5813 length specifier like this:
5814
5815 @example
5816 .macro opcode base length
5817 \base.\length
5818 .endm
5819 @end example
5820
5821 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5822 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5823 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5824
5825 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5826
5827 @table @code
5828 @item Insert white space
5829 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5830 solution. eg:
5831
5832 @example
5833 .macro label l
5834 \l :
5835 .endm
5836 @end example
5837
5838 @item Use @samp{\()}
5839 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5840 the following text. eg:
5841
5842 @example
5843 .macro opcode base length
5844 \base\().\length
5845 .endm
5846 @end example
5847
5848 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5849 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5850 used as a separator. eg:
5851
5852 @example
5853 .altmacro
5854 .macro label l
5855 l&:
5856 .endm
5857 @end example
5858 @end table
5859
5860 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5861 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5862 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5863
5864 @item .endm
5865 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5866 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5867
5868 @item .exitm
5869 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5870 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5871
5872 @cindex number of macros executed
5873 @cindex macros, count executed
5874 @item \@@
5875 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5876 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5877 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5878
5879 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5880 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5881 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5882 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5883 @end ftable
5884
5885 @node MRI
5886 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5887
5888 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5889 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5890 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5891 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5892 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5893 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5894
5895 @node Noaltmacro
5896 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5897 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5898
5899 @node Nolist
5900 @section @code{.nolist}
5901
5902 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5903 @cindex listing control, turning off
5904 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5905 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5906 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5907 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5908 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5909
5910 @node Octa
5911 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5912
5913 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5914 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5915 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5916 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5917 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5918 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5919
5920 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5921 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5922
5923 @node Offset
5924 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5925
5926 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5927 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5928 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5929 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5930 directive.
5931
5932 @node Org
5933 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5934
5935 @cindex @code{org} directive
5936 @cindex location counter, advancing
5937 @cindex advancing location counter
5938 @cindex current address, advancing
5939 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5940 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5941 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5942 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5943 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5944 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5945 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5946 is the same as the current subsection.
5947
5948 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5949 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5950 backwards.
5951
5952 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5953 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5954 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5955 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5956 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5957 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5958
5959 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5960 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5961 people's assemblers.
5962
5963 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5964 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5965 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5966 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5967
5968 @node P2align
5969 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5970
5971 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5972 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5973 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5974 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5975 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5976 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5977 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5978 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5979
5980 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5981 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5982 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5983 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5984 with no-op instructions.
5985
5986 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5987 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5988 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5989 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5990 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5991 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5992 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5993
5994 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5995 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5996 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5997 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5998 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5999 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
6000 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6001 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6002 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6003 undefined.
6004
6005 @ifset ELF
6006 @node PopSection
6007 @section @code{.popsection}
6008
6009 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
6010 @cindex Section Stack
6011 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6012 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6013 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6014 (@pxref{Previous}).
6015
6016 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6017 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6018 stack.
6019 @end ifset
6020
6021 @ifset ELF
6022 @node Previous
6023 @section @code{.previous}
6024
6025 @cindex @code{previous} directive
6026 @cindex Section Stack
6027 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6028 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6029 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6030 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6031
6032 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6033 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6034 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6035 subsections). For example:
6036
6037 @smallexample
6038 .section A
6039 .subsection 1
6040 .word 0x1234
6041 .subsection 2
6042 .word 0x5678
6043 .previous
6044 .word 0x9abc
6045 @end smallexample
6046
6047 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6048 section A. Whilst:
6049
6050 @smallexample
6051 .section A
6052 .subsection 1
6053 # Now in section A subsection 1
6054 .word 0x1234
6055 .section B
6056 .subsection 0
6057 # Now in section B subsection 0
6058 .word 0x5678
6059 .subsection 1
6060 # Now in section B subsection 1
6061 .word 0x9abc
6062 .previous
6063 # Now in section B subsection 0
6064 .word 0xdef0
6065 @end smallexample
6066
6067 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6068 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6069
6070 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6071 the top section on the section stack.
6072 @end ifset
6073
6074 @node Print
6075 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6076
6077 @cindex @code{print} directive
6078 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6079 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6080
6081 @ifset ELF
6082 @node Protected
6083 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6084
6085 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6086 @cindex visibility
6087 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6088 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6089
6090 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6091 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6092 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6093 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6094 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6095 this.
6096 @end ifset
6097
6098 @node Psize
6099 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6100
6101 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6102 @cindex listing control: paper size
6103 @cindex paper size, for listings
6104 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6105 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6106
6107 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6108 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6109 default width is 200 columns.
6110
6111 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6112 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6113 @code{.eject}).
6114
6115 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6116 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6117
6118 @node Purgem
6119 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6120
6121 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6122 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6123 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6124
6125 @ifset ELF
6126 @node PushSection
6127 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6128
6129 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6130 @cindex Section Stack
6131 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6132 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6133 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6134 (@pxref{Previous}).
6135
6136 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6137 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6138 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6139 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6140 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6141 @end ifset
6142
6143 @node Quad
6144 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6145
6146 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6147 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6148 each bignum, it emits
6149 @ifclear bignum-16
6150 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6151 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6152 @cindex eight-byte integer
6153 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6154
6155 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6156 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6157 @end ifclear
6158 @ifset bignum-16
6159 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6160 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6161 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6162 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6163 @end ifset
6164
6165 @node Reloc
6166 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6167
6168 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6169 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6170 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6171 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6172 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6173 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6174 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6175 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6176 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6177 section.
6178
6179 @node Rept
6180 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6181
6182 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6183 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6184 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6185
6186 For example, assembling
6187
6188 @example
6189 .rept 3
6190 .long 0
6191 .endr
6192 @end example
6193
6194 is equivalent to assembling
6195
6196 @example
6197 .long 0
6198 .long 0
6199 .long 0
6200 @end example
6201
6202 @node Sbttl
6203 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6204
6205 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6206 @cindex subtitles for listings
6207 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6208 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6209 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6210
6211 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6212 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6213
6214 @ifset COFF
6215 @node Scl
6216 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6217
6218 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6219 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6220 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6221 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6222 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6223 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6224 symbolic debugging information.
6225 @ifset BOUT
6226
6227 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6228 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6229 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6230 @end ifset
6231 @end ifset
6232
6233 @ifset COFF-ELF
6234 @node Section
6235 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6236
6237 @cindex named section
6238 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6239 named @var{name}.
6240
6241 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6242 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6243 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6244
6245 @ifset COFF
6246 @ifset ELF
6247 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6248 @subheading COFF Version
6249 @end ifset
6250
6251 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6252 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6253 ways:
6254
6255 @smallexample
6256 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6257 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6258 @end smallexample
6259
6260 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6261 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6262 @table @code
6263 @item b
6264 bss section (uninitialized data)
6265 @item n
6266 section is not loaded
6267 @item w
6268 writable section
6269 @item d
6270 data section
6271 @item e
6272 exclude section from linking
6273 @item r
6274 read-only section
6275 @item x
6276 executable section
6277 @item s
6278 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6279 @item a
6280 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6281 @item y
6282 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6283 @item 0-9
6284 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6285 @end table
6286
6287 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6288 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6289 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6290 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6291 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6292
6293 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6294 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6295 @end ifset
6296
6297 @ifset ELF
6298 @ifset COFF
6299 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6300 @subheading ELF Version
6301 @end ifset
6302
6303 @cindex Section Stack
6304 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6305 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6306 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6307 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6308
6309 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6310 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6311
6312 @smallexample
6313 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6314 @end smallexample
6315
6316 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6317 @kindex --sectname-subst
6318 @cindex section name substitution
6319 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6320 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6321 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6322
6323 @smallexample
6324 .macro exception_code
6325 .section %S.exception
6326 [exception code here]
6327 .previous
6328 .endm
6329
6330 .text
6331 [code]
6332 exception_code
6333 [...]
6334
6335 .section .init
6336 [init code]
6337 exception_code
6338 [...]
6339 @end smallexample
6340
6341 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6342 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6343 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between anciliary sections that are
6344 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from anciliary sections that
6345 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6346 macros just for that purpose.
6347
6348 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6349 combination of the following characters:
6350 @table @code
6351 @item a
6352 section is allocatable
6353 @item e
6354 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6355 @item w
6356 section is writable
6357 @item x
6358 section is executable
6359 @item M
6360 section is mergeable
6361 @item S
6362 section contains zero terminated strings
6363 @item G
6364 section is a member of a section group
6365 @item T
6366 section is used for thread-local-storage
6367 @item ?
6368 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6369 @end table
6370
6371 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6372 @table @code
6373 @item @@progbits
6374 section contains data
6375 @item @@nobits
6376 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6377 @item @@note
6378 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6379 @item @@init_array
6380 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6381 @item @@fini_array
6382 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6383 @item @@preinit_array
6384 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6385 @end table
6386
6387 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6388
6389 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6390 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6391 @code{%} character.
6392
6393 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6394 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6395
6396 @smallexample
6397 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6398 @end smallexample
6399
6400 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6401 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6402 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6403 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6404 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6405 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6406 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6407 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6408 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6409
6410 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6411 be present along with an additional field like this:
6412
6413 @smallexample
6414 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6415 @end smallexample
6416
6417 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6418 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6419 @table @code
6420 @item comdat
6421 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6422 @item .gnu.linkonce
6423 an alias for comdat
6424 @end table
6425
6426 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6427 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6428
6429 @smallexample
6430 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6431 @end smallexample
6432
6433 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6434 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6435 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6436 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6437 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6438 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6439
6440 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6441 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6442 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6443 executable. The section will contain data.
6444
6445 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6446 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6447
6448 @smallexample
6449 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6450 @end smallexample
6451
6452 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6453 separated flags:
6454 @table @code
6455 @item #alloc
6456 section is allocatable
6457 @item #write
6458 section is writable
6459 @item #execinstr
6460 section is executable
6461 @item #exclude
6462 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6463 @item #tls
6464 section is used for thread local storage
6465 @end table
6466
6467 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6468 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6469 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6470 work.
6471 @end ifset
6472 @end ifset
6473
6474 @node Set
6475 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6476
6477 @cindex @code{set} directive
6478 @cindex symbol value, setting
6479 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6480 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6481 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6482 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6483
6484 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6485 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6486 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6487 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6488 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6489 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6490 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6491 different symbols.
6492
6493 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6494 file is the last value stored into it.
6495
6496 @ifset Z80
6497 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6498 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6499 @end ifset
6500
6501 @node Short
6502 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6503
6504 @cindex @code{short} directive
6505 @ifset GENERIC
6506 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6507 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6508
6509 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6510 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6511 @end ifset
6512 @ifclear GENERIC
6513 @ifset W16
6514 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6515 @end ifset
6516 @ifset W32
6517 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6518 a 16 bit number for each.
6519 @end ifset
6520 @end ifclear
6521
6522 @node Single
6523 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6524
6525 @cindex @code{single} directive
6526 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6527 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6528 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6529 @ifset GENERIC
6530 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6531 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6532 @end ifset
6533 @ifclear GENERIC
6534 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6535 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6536 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6537 @end ifset
6538 @end ifclear
6539
6540 @ifset COFF-ELF
6541 @node Size
6542 @section @code{.size}
6543
6544 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6545
6546 @ifset COFF
6547 @ifset ELF
6548 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6549 @subheading COFF Version
6550 @end ifset
6551
6552 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6553 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6554 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6555
6556 @smallexample
6557 .size @var{expression}
6558 @end smallexample
6559
6560 @ifset BOUT
6561 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6562 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6563 ignores it.
6564 @end ifset
6565 @end ifset
6566
6567 @ifset ELF
6568 @ifset COFF
6569 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6570 @subheading ELF Version
6571 @end ifset
6572
6573 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6574 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6575
6576 @smallexample
6577 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6578 @end smallexample
6579
6580 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6581 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6582 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6583 symbols.
6584 @end ifset
6585 @end ifset
6586
6587 @ifclear no-space-dir
6588 @node Skip
6589 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6590
6591 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6592 @cindex filling memory
6593 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6594 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6595 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6596 @samp{.space}.
6597 @end ifclear
6598
6599 @node Sleb128
6600 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6601
6602 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6603 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6604 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6605 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6606
6607 @ifclear no-space-dir
6608 @node Space
6609 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6610
6611 @cindex @code{space} directive
6612 @cindex filling memory
6613 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6614 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6615 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6616 as @samp{.skip}.
6617
6618 @ifset HPPA
6619 @quotation
6620 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6621 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6622 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6623 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6624 for a summary.
6625 @end quotation
6626 @end ifset
6627 @end ifclear
6628
6629 @ifset have-stabs
6630 @node Stab
6631 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6632
6633 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6634 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6635 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6636 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6637 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6638 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6639 Up to five fields are required:
6640
6641 @table @var
6642 @item string
6643 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6644 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6645 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6646 using this field.
6647
6648 @item type
6649 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6650 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6651 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6652
6653 @item other
6654 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6655 low 8 bits of this expression.
6656
6657 @item desc
6658 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6659 bits of this expression.
6660
6661 @item value
6662 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6663 @end table
6664
6665 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6666 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6667 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6668 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6669
6670 @table @code
6671 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6672 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6673
6674 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6675 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6676 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6677 strings.
6678
6679 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6680 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6681 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6682 assembled.
6683
6684 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6685 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6686 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6687
6688 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6689 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6690 All five fields are specified.
6691 @end table
6692 @end ifset
6693 @c end have-stabs
6694
6695 @node String
6696 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6697 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6698
6699 @cindex string, copying to object file
6700 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6701 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6702 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6703 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6704 @cindex @code{string} directive
6705 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6706 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6707 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6708 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6709
6710 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6711 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6712 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6713 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6714
6715 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6716 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6717 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6718 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6719
6720 Example:
6721 @smallexample
6722 .string32 "BYE"
6723 expands to:
6724 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6725 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6726 @end smallexample
6727
6728
6729 @node Struct
6730 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6731
6732 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6733 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6734 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6735 @smallexample
6736 .struct 0
6737 field1:
6738 .struct field1 + 4
6739 field2:
6740 .struct field2 + 4
6741 field3:
6742 @end smallexample
6743 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6744 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6745 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6746 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6747 before further assembly.
6748
6749 @ifset ELF
6750 @node SubSection
6751 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6752
6753 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6754 @cindex Section Stack
6755 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6756 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6757 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6758 (@pxref{Previous}).
6759
6760 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6761 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6762 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6763 @end ifset
6764
6765 @ifset ELF
6766 @node Symver
6767 @section @code{.symver}
6768 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6769 @cindex symbol versioning
6770 @cindex versions of symbols
6771 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6772 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6773 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6774 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6775 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6776 shared library.
6777
6778 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6779 @smallexample
6780 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6781 @end smallexample
6782 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6783 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6784 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6785 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6786 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6787 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6788 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6789 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6790 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6791 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6792 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6793 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6794 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6795 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6796
6797 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6798 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6799 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6800 symbol table.
6801
6802 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6803 @smallexample
6804 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6805 @end smallexample
6806 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6807 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6808 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6809 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6810
6811 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6812 @smallexample
6813 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6814 @end smallexample
6815 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6816 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6817 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6818 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6819 @end ifset
6820
6821 @ifset COFF
6822 @node Tag
6823 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6824
6825 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6826 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6827 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6828 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6829 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6830 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6831 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6832 @ifset BOUT
6833
6834 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6835 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6836 ignores it.
6837 @end ifset
6838 @end ifset
6839
6840 @node Text
6841 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6842
6843 @cindex @code{text} directive
6844 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6845 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6846 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6847 is used.
6848
6849 @node Title
6850 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6851
6852 @cindex @code{title} directive
6853 @cindex listing control: title line
6854 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6855 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6856
6857 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6858 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6859
6860 @ifset COFF-ELF
6861 @node Type
6862 @section @code{.type}
6863
6864 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6865
6866 @ifset COFF
6867 @ifset ELF
6868 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6869 @subheading COFF Version
6870 @end ifset
6871
6872 @cindex COFF symbol type
6873 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6874 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6875 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6876 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6877
6878 @smallexample
6879 .type @var{int}
6880 @end smallexample
6881
6882 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6883 entry.
6884
6885 @ifset BOUT
6886 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6887 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6888 directive but ignores it.
6889 @end ifset
6890 @end ifset
6891
6892 @ifset ELF
6893 @ifset COFF
6894 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6895 @subheading ELF Version
6896 @end ifset
6897
6898 @cindex ELF symbol type
6899 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6900 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6901 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6902
6903 @smallexample
6904 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6905 @end smallexample
6906
6907 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6908 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6909 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6910 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6911
6912 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6913 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6914 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6915 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6916 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6917 assemblers.
6918
6919 The syntaxes supported are:
6920
6921 @smallexample
6922 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6923 .type <name>,#<type>
6924 .type <name>,@@<type>
6925 .type <name>,%<type>
6926 .type <name>,"<type>"
6927 @end smallexample
6928
6929 The types supported are:
6930
6931 @table @gcctabopt
6932 @item STT_FUNC
6933 @itemx function
6934 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6935
6936 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6937 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6938 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6939 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6940
6941 @item STT_OBJECT
6942 @itemx object
6943 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6944
6945 @item STT_TLS
6946 @itemx tls_object
6947 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6948
6949 @item STT_COMMON
6950 @itemx common
6951 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6952
6953 @item STT_NOTYPE
6954 @itemx notype
6955 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6956
6957 @item gnu_unique_object
6958 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6959 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6960 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6961 systems).
6962
6963 @end table
6964
6965 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6966
6967 @end ifset
6968 @end ifset
6969
6970 @node Uleb128
6971 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6972
6973 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6974 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6975 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6976 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6977
6978 @ifset COFF
6979 @node Val
6980 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6981
6982 @cindex @code{val} directive
6983 @cindex COFF value attribute
6984 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6985 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6986 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6987 entry.
6988 @ifset BOUT
6989
6990 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6991 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6992 @end ifset
6993 @end ifset
6994
6995 @ifset ELF
6996 @node Version
6997 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6998
6999 @cindex @code{version} directive
7000 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7001 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7002 @end ifset
7003
7004 @ifset ELF
7005 @node VTableEntry
7006 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7007
7008 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7009 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7010 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7011
7012 @node VTableInherit
7013 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7014
7015 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7016 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7017 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7018 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7019 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7020 @end ifset
7021
7022 @node Warning
7023 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7024 @cindex warning directive
7025 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7026 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7027
7028 @node Weak
7029 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7030
7031 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7032 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7033 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7034
7035 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7036 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7037 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7038
7039 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7040 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7041 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7042
7043 @node Weakref
7044 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7045
7046 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7047 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7048 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7049 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7050 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7051 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7052
7053 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7054 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7055 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7056 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7057 had the references to the alias removed.
7058
7059 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7060 within the assembler.
7061
7062 @node Word
7063 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7064
7065 @cindex @code{word} directive
7066 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7067 separated by commas.
7068 @ifclear GENERIC
7069 @ifset W32
7070 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7071 @end ifset
7072 @ifset W16
7073 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7074 @end ifset
7075 @end ifclear
7076 @ifset GENERIC
7077
7078 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7079 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7080 @end ifset
7081
7082 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7083 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7084 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7085 @cindex difference tables altered
7086 @cindex altered difference tables
7087 @quotation
7088 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7089 @end quotation
7090
7091 @ifset GENERIC
7092 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7093 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7094 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7095 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7096
7097 @end ifset
7098 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7099 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7100 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7101 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7102 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7103 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7104 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7105 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7106 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7107 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7108 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7109 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7110 @code{sym2}.
7111
7112 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7113 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7114 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7115 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7116 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7117 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7118 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7119
7120 @ifset INTERNALS
7121 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7122 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7123 assembly language programmers.
7124 @end ifset
7125 @end ifset
7126 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7127
7128 @ifclear no-space-dir
7129 @node Zero
7130 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7131
7132 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7133 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7134 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7135 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7136 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7137 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7138 @end ifclear
7139
7140 @node Deprecated
7141 @section Deprecated Directives
7142
7143 @cindex deprecated directives
7144 @cindex obsolescent directives
7145 One day these directives won't work.
7146 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7147 @table @t
7148 @item .abort
7149 @item .line
7150 @end table
7151
7152 @ifset ELF
7153 @node Object Attributes
7154 @chapter Object Attributes
7155 @cindex object attributes
7156
7157 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7158 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7159 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7160 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7161 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7162 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7163 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7164 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7165 newer generation at run-time.
7166
7167 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7168 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7169 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7170 correctly.
7171
7172 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7173 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7174 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7175 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7176 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7177 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7178
7179 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7180 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7181
7182 @menu
7183 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7184 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7185 @end menu
7186
7187 @node GNU Object Attributes
7188 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7189
7190 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7191 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7192
7193 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7194 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7195 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7196 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7197 architecture-dependent ones.
7198
7199 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7200
7201 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7202
7203 @table @r
7204 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7205 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7206 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7207 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7208 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7209 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7210 @end table
7211
7212 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7213
7214 @table @r
7215 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7216 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7217
7218 @itemize @bullet
7219 @item
7220 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7221 @item
7222 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7223 double-precision FPU.
7224 @item
7225 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7226 @item
7227 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7228 @item
7229 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7230 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7231 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7232 @item
7233 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7234 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7235 general-purpose registers.
7236 @item
7237 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7238 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7239 @item
7240 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7241 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7242 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7243 @end itemize
7244 @end table
7245
7246 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7247
7248 @table @r
7249 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7250 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7251
7252 @itemize @bullet
7253 @item
7254 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7255 @item
7256 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7257 @item
7258 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7259 @item
7260 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7261 @end itemize
7262
7263 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7264 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7265
7266 @itemize @bullet
7267 @item
7268 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7269 @item
7270 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7271 @item
7272 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7273 @item
7274 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7275 @end itemize
7276 @end table
7277
7278 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7279
7280 @table @r
7281 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7282 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7283
7284 @itemize @bullet
7285 @item
7286 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7287 @item
7288 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7289 @item
7290 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7291 @end itemize
7292 @end table
7293
7294 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7295 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7296
7297 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7298 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7299 mailing list.
7300
7301 @itemize @bullet
7302 @item
7303 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7304 @item
7305 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7306 @item
7307 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7308 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7309 @item
7310 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7311 @item
7312 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7313 @item
7314 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7315 @end itemize
7316
7317 @end ifset
7318
7319 @ifset GENERIC
7320 @node Machine Dependencies
7321 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7322
7323 @cindex machine dependencies
7324 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7325 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7326 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7327 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7328 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7329 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7330 optimization.
7331
7332 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7333 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7334 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7335
7336 @menu
7337 @ifset AARCH64
7338 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7339 @end ifset
7340 @ifset ALPHA
7341 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7342 @end ifset
7343 @ifset ARC
7344 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7345 @end ifset
7346 @ifset ARM
7347 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7348 @end ifset
7349 @ifset AVR
7350 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7351 @end ifset
7352 @ifset Blackfin
7353 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7354 @end ifset
7355 @ifset CR16
7356 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7357 @end ifset
7358 @ifset CRIS
7359 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7360 @end ifset
7361 @ifset D10V
7362 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7363 @end ifset
7364 @ifset D30V
7365 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7366 @end ifset
7367 @ifset EPIPHANY
7368 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7369 @end ifset
7370 @ifset H8/300
7371 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7372 @end ifset
7373 @ifset HPPA
7374 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7375 @end ifset
7376 @ifset I370
7377 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7378 @end ifset
7379 @ifset I80386
7380 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7381 @end ifset
7382 @ifset I860
7383 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7384 @end ifset
7385 @ifset I960
7386 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7387 @end ifset
7388 @ifset IA64
7389 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7390 @end ifset
7391 @ifset IP2K
7392 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7393 @end ifset
7394 @ifset LM32
7395 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7396 @end ifset
7397 @ifset M32C
7398 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7399 @end ifset
7400 @ifset M32R
7401 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7402 @end ifset
7403 @ifset M680X0
7404 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7405 @end ifset
7406 @ifset M68HC11
7407 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7408 @end ifset
7409 @ifset METAG
7410 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7411 @end ifset
7412 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7413 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7414 @end ifset
7415 @ifset MIPS
7416 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7417 @end ifset
7418 @ifset MMIX
7419 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7420 @end ifset
7421 @ifset MSP430
7422 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7423 @end ifset
7424 @ifset NDS32
7425 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7426 @end ifset
7427 @ifset NIOSII
7428 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7429 @end ifset
7430 @ifset NS32K
7431 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7432 @end ifset
7433 @ifset PDP11
7434 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7435 @end ifset
7436 @ifset PJ
7437 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7438 @end ifset
7439 @ifset PPC
7440 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7441 @end ifset
7442 @ifset RL78
7443 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7444 @end ifset
7445 @ifset RX
7446 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7447 @end ifset
7448 @ifset S390
7449 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7450 @end ifset
7451 @ifset SCORE
7452 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7453 @end ifset
7454 @ifset SH
7455 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7456 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7457 @end ifset
7458 @ifset SPARC
7459 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7460 @end ifset
7461 @ifset TIC54X
7462 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7463 @end ifset
7464 @ifset TIC6X
7465 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7466 @end ifset
7467 @ifset TILEGX
7468 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7469 @end ifset
7470 @ifset TILEPRO
7471 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7472 @end ifset
7473 @ifset V850
7474 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7475 @end ifset
7476 @ifset VAX
7477 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7478 @end ifset
7479 @ifset VISIUM
7480 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7481 @end ifset
7482 @ifset XGATE
7483 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7484 @end ifset
7485 @ifset XSTORMY16
7486 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7487 @end ifset
7488 @ifset XTENSA
7489 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7490 @end ifset
7491 @ifset Z80
7492 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7493 @end ifset
7494 @ifset Z8000
7495 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7496 @end ifset
7497 @end menu
7498
7499 @lowersections
7500 @end ifset
7501
7502 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7503 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7504 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7505 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7506 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7507 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7508 @c in both conditional blocks.
7509
7510 @ifset AARCH64
7511 @include c-aarch64.texi
7512 @end ifset
7513
7514 @ifset ALPHA
7515 @include c-alpha.texi
7516 @end ifset
7517
7518 @ifset ARC
7519 @include c-arc.texi
7520 @end ifset
7521
7522 @ifset ARM
7523 @include c-arm.texi
7524 @end ifset
7525
7526 @ifset AVR
7527 @include c-avr.texi
7528 @end ifset
7529
7530 @ifset Blackfin
7531 @include c-bfin.texi
7532 @end ifset
7533
7534 @ifset CR16
7535 @include c-cr16.texi
7536 @end ifset
7537
7538 @ifset CRIS
7539 @include c-cris.texi
7540 @end ifset
7541
7542 @ifset Renesas-all
7543 @ifclear GENERIC
7544 @node Machine Dependencies
7545 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7546
7547 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7548 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7549 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7550 family.
7551
7552 @menu
7553 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7554 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7555 @end menu
7556 @lowersections
7557 @end ifclear
7558 @end ifset
7559
7560 @ifset D10V
7561 @include c-d10v.texi
7562 @end ifset
7563
7564 @ifset D30V
7565 @include c-d30v.texi
7566 @end ifset
7567
7568 @ifset EPIPHANY
7569 @include c-epiphany.texi
7570 @end ifset
7571
7572 @ifset H8/300
7573 @include c-h8300.texi
7574 @end ifset
7575
7576 @ifset HPPA
7577 @include c-hppa.texi
7578 @end ifset
7579
7580 @ifset I370
7581 @include c-i370.texi
7582 @end ifset
7583
7584 @ifset I80386
7585 @include c-i386.texi
7586 @end ifset
7587
7588 @ifset I860
7589 @include c-i860.texi
7590 @end ifset
7591
7592 @ifset I960
7593 @include c-i960.texi
7594 @end ifset
7595
7596 @ifset IA64
7597 @include c-ia64.texi
7598 @end ifset
7599
7600 @ifset IP2K
7601 @include c-ip2k.texi
7602 @end ifset
7603
7604 @ifset LM32
7605 @include c-lm32.texi
7606 @end ifset
7607
7608 @ifset M32C
7609 @include c-m32c.texi
7610 @end ifset
7611
7612 @ifset M32R
7613 @include c-m32r.texi
7614 @end ifset
7615
7616 @ifset M680X0
7617 @include c-m68k.texi
7618 @end ifset
7619
7620 @ifset M68HC11
7621 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7622 @end ifset
7623
7624 @ifset METAG
7625 @include c-metag.texi
7626 @end ifset
7627
7628 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7629 @include c-microblaze.texi
7630 @end ifset
7631
7632 @ifset MIPS
7633 @include c-mips.texi
7634 @end ifset
7635
7636 @ifset MMIX
7637 @include c-mmix.texi
7638 @end ifset
7639
7640 @ifset MSP430
7641 @include c-msp430.texi
7642 @end ifset
7643
7644 @ifset NDS32
7645 @include c-nds32.texi
7646 @end ifset
7647
7648 @ifset NIOSII
7649 @include c-nios2.texi
7650 @end ifset
7651
7652 @ifset NS32K
7653 @include c-ns32k.texi
7654 @end ifset
7655
7656 @ifset PDP11
7657 @include c-pdp11.texi
7658 @end ifset
7659
7660 @ifset PJ
7661 @include c-pj.texi
7662 @end ifset
7663
7664 @ifset PPC
7665 @include c-ppc.texi
7666 @end ifset
7667
7668 @ifset RL78
7669 @include c-rl78.texi
7670 @end ifset
7671
7672 @ifset RX
7673 @include c-rx.texi
7674 @end ifset
7675
7676 @ifset S390
7677 @include c-s390.texi
7678 @end ifset
7679
7680 @ifset SCORE
7681 @include c-score.texi
7682 @end ifset
7683
7684 @ifset SH
7685 @include c-sh.texi
7686 @include c-sh64.texi
7687 @end ifset
7688
7689 @ifset SPARC
7690 @include c-sparc.texi
7691 @end ifset
7692
7693 @ifset TIC54X
7694 @include c-tic54x.texi
7695 @end ifset
7696
7697 @ifset TIC6X
7698 @include c-tic6x.texi
7699 @end ifset
7700
7701 @ifset TILEGX
7702 @include c-tilegx.texi
7703 @end ifset
7704
7705 @ifset TILEPRO
7706 @include c-tilepro.texi
7707 @end ifset
7708
7709 @ifset V850
7710 @include c-v850.texi
7711 @end ifset
7712
7713 @ifset VAX
7714 @include c-vax.texi
7715 @end ifset
7716
7717 @ifset VISIUM
7718 @include c-visium.texi
7719 @end ifset
7720
7721 @ifset XGATE
7722 @include c-xgate.texi
7723 @end ifset
7724
7725 @ifset XSTORMY16
7726 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7727 @end ifset
7728
7729 @ifset XTENSA
7730 @include c-xtensa.texi
7731 @end ifset
7732
7733 @ifset Z80
7734 @include c-z80.texi
7735 @end ifset
7736
7737 @ifset Z8000
7738 @include c-z8k.texi
7739 @end ifset
7740
7741 @ifset GENERIC
7742 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7743 @raisesections
7744 @end ifset
7745
7746 @node Reporting Bugs
7747 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7748 @cindex bugs in assembler
7749 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7750
7751 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7752
7753 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7754 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7755 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7756 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7757
7758 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7759 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7760
7761 @menu
7762 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7763 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7764 @end menu
7765
7766 @node Bug Criteria
7767 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7768 @cindex bug criteria
7769
7770 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7771
7772 @itemize @bullet
7773 @cindex fatal signal
7774 @cindex assembler crash
7775 @cindex crash of assembler
7776 @item
7777 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7778 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7779
7780 @cindex error on valid input
7781 @item
7782 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7783
7784 @cindex invalid input
7785 @item
7786 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7787 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7788 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7789
7790 @item
7791 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7792 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7793 @end itemize
7794
7795 @node Bug Reporting
7796 @section How to Report Bugs
7797 @cindex bug reports
7798 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7799
7800 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7801 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7802 contact that organization first.
7803
7804 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7805 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7806 distribution.
7807
7808 @ifset BUGURL
7809 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7810 to @value{BUGURL}.
7811 @end ifset
7812
7813 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7814 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7815 fact or leave it out, state it!
7816
7817 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7818 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7819 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7820 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7821 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7822 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7823 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7824 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7825 and the most helpful.
7826
7827 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7828 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7829 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7830
7831 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7832 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7833 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7834 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7835
7836 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7837
7838 @itemize @bullet
7839 @item
7840 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7841 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7842
7843 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7844 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7845
7846 @item
7847 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7848
7849 @item
7850 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7851 version number.
7852
7853 @item
7854 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7855 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7856
7857 @item
7858 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7859 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7860 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7861
7862 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7863 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7864
7865 @item
7866 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7867 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7868 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7869 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7870 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7871 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7872 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7873
7874 @item
7875 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7876 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7877
7878 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7879 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7880 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7881 make a mistake.
7882
7883 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7884 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7885 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7886 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7887 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7888 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7889 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7890 observations.
7891
7892 @item
7893 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7894 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7895 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7896 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7897 by line number.
7898
7899 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7900 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7901 @end itemize
7902
7903 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7904
7905 @itemize @bullet
7906 @item
7907 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7908
7909 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7910 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7911 changes will not affect it.
7912
7913 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7914 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7915 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7916 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7917
7918 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7919 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7920 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7921 less time, and so on.
7922
7923 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7924 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7925
7926 @item
7927 A patch for the bug.
7928
7929 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7930 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7931 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7932 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7933
7934 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7935 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7936 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7937 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7938
7939 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7940 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7941 help us to understand.
7942
7943 @item
7944 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7945
7946 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7947 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7948 @end itemize
7949
7950 @node Acknowledgements
7951 @chapter Acknowledgements
7952
7953 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7954 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7955 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7956 @c (October 2012),
7957 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7958
7959 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7960 more details?}
7961
7962 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7963 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7964 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7965
7966 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7967 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7968 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7969 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7970 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7971 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7972 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7973 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7974 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7975 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7976
7977 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7978 in format-specific I/O modules.
7979
7980 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7981 has done much work with it since.
7982
7983 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7984
7985 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7986
7987 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7988 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7989
7990 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7991 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7992 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7993 support a.out format.
7994
7995 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7996 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7997 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7998 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7999 targets.
8000
8001 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8002 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8003 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8004 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8005 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8006 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8007 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8008
8009 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
8010 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8011 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8012 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8013
8014 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8015
8016 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8017
8018 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8019 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8020 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8021 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8022
8023 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8024 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8025 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8026 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8027 and some initial 64-bit support).
8028
8029 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8030
8031 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8032 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8033
8034 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8035 flavors.
8036
8037 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8038 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8039
8040 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8041 configuration enhancements.
8042
8043 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8044
8045 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8046 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8047 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8048 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8049
8050 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8051 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8052 @include fdl.texi
8053
8054 @node AS Index
8055 @unnumbered AS Index
8056
8057 @printindex cp
8058
8059 @bye
8060 @c Local Variables:
8061 @c fill-column: 79
8062 @c End:
This page took 0.19359 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.